Batreiie
The Business q/ Innovation
Environmental Technology
Verification Program
Advanced Monitoring
Systems Center
Quality Assurance Project Plan for
Verification of
Sediment Ecotoxicity Assessment Ring
(SEA Ring)
-------
Sediment Ecotoxicity Assessment Ring
QAPP
Page 2 of 73
Version 1
May 16, 2012
Verification of the Sediment Ecotoxicity Assessment Ring
Draft
May 16, 2012
Version 1
Prepared by
Battelle
505 King Avenue
Columbus, OH 43201-2693
-------
Sediment Ecotoxicity Assessment Ring
QAPP
Page 3 of 73
Version 1
May 16, 2012
SECTION A
PROJECT MANAGEMENT
Al VENDOR APPROVAL PAGE
ETV Advanced Monitoring Systems Center
Quality Assurance Project Plan for Verification of
the Sediment Ecotoxicity Assessment Ring
Draft
May 16, 2012
APPROVAL:
Name
Date
Notice
The U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, through its Office of Research and Development, funded and managed,
or partially funded and collaborated in, the research described herein. It has been subjected to the Agency's peer
and administrative review. Any opinions expressed in this report are those of the author(s) and do not necessarily
reflect the views of the Agency, therefore, no official endorsement should be inferred. Any mention of trade names
or commercial products does not constitute endorsement or recommendation for use.
-------
Sediment Ecotoxicity Assessment Ring
QAPP
Page 4 of 73
Version 1
May 16, 2012
A2 CONTENTS
Section Page
SECTION A: PROJECT MANAGEMENT 3
Al Vendor Approval Page 3
A2 Contents 4
APPENDICES 5
FIGURES 6
TABLES 6
A3 ACRONYMS AND ABBREVIATIONS 7
A4 DISTRIBUTION LIST 9
A5 VERIFICATION TEST ORGANIZATION 10
A5.1 Battelle's Test Program Roles and Responsibility 11
A5.2 Technology Representative 14
A5.3 EPA 15
A5.4 Verification Test Stakeholders 16
A5.5 Reference Laboratories 16
A6 BACKGROUND 18
A6.1 Technology Need 18
A6.2 SEA Ring Technology Description 19
A7 VERIFICATION TEST DESCRIPTION AND SCHEDULE 22
A7.1 Verification Test Description 22
A7.2 Verification Test Schedule 23
A7.3 Verification Location 23
A8 QUALITY OBJECTIVES 24
A9 SPECIAL TRAINING/CERTIFICATION 30
A10 DOCUMENTATION AND RECORDS 31
SECTION B: MEASUREMENT AND DATA ACQUISITION 32
Bl EXPERIMENTAL DESIGN 32
Bl.l Test Procedures 32
B 1.1.1 Sediment and Water Sampling 32
Bl.l.2 Benthic and Aquatic Organism Collection 35
Bl.l.3 SEA Ring Preparation and Operation 36
B1.2 Laboratory SEA Ring Test 37
Bl.2.1 Repeatability (Replicate Variability) 38
Bl.2.2 Comparability 40
Bl.2.3 Reproducibility 41
B1.3 EPA/ASTM Method Laboratory Comparability Tests 41
B1.4 Operational Factors 43
B1.5 Supporting Analyses 43
B1.6 Statistical Analysis 44
B2 SAMPLING METHOD REQUIREMENTS 49
B2.1 Toxicity Test Breakdown - Collection Test Organisms 49
B2.2 Collection and Analysis of Tissue Chemical Samples 49
-------
Sediment Ecotoxicity Assessment Ring
QAPP
Page 5 of 73
Version 1
May 16, 2012
B2.3 Collection and Analysis of Water and Sediment Samples 49
B3 SAMPLE HANDLING AND CUSTODY REQUIREMENTS 50
B3.1 Handling of Aquatic Organisms 50
B3.2 Sample Custody 50
B3.3 Sample Receipt 51
B4 ANALYTICAL METHOD REQUIREMENTS 52
B4.1 Water Analysis 52
B4.2 Sediment and Tissue Analysis 52
B4.3 Tissue Lipid Analysis 53
B4.4 Instrument Calibration Requirements 53
B4.5 Quality Control 54
B5 Quality Control Requirements 56
B5.1 Reference Toxicant Test 56
B5.2 Control Performance 56
B5.3 Test Conditions Acceptability 56
B5.4 Comparison to Background Tissue Levels 57
B6 INSTRUMENT/EQUIPMENT TESTING, INSPECTION, AND MAINTENANCE 58
B7 INSTRUMENT CALIBRATION AND FREQUENCY 59
B8 INSPECTION/ACCEPTANCE OF SUPPLIES AND CONSUMABLES 60
B9 NON-DIRECT MEASUREMENTS 61
BIO DATA MANAGEMENT 62
SECTION C: ASSESSMENT AND OVERSIGHT 65
Cl ASSESSMENT AND RESPONSE ACTIONS 65
Cl.l Performance Evaluation Audit 65
C1.2 Technical Systems Audits 66
C1.3 Data Quality Audits 66
C1.4 QA/QC Reporting 67
C2 REPORTS to Management 68
SECTION D: DATA VALIDATION AND USABILITY 69
Dl Data Review, Verification, and Validation Requirements 69
D2 Verification and Validation Methods 70
D3 Reconciliation with User Requirements 71
SECTION E: REFERENCES 72
APPENDICES
Appendix A: TEST DATA SHEETS
Appendix B: CONTROL CHARTS
Appendix C: CHAIN OF CUSTODY FORMS
Appendix D: SEA RING MANUAL
Appendix E: LABORATORY SOPs
-------
Sediment Ecotoxicity Assessment Ring
QAPP
Page 6 of 73
Version 1
May 16, 2012
FIGURES
Figure 1. Organizational Chart 12
Figure 2. Schematic of SEA Ring Technology 20
Figure 3. Multiple Lines of Evidence Use of SEA Ring Technology 21
Figure 4. Second Generation SEA Ring Device (left). Field Evaluation in Beach Deployment
(right) 21
Figure 5. Overview of Sediment Toxicity and Bioaccumulation Testing Approach with Both
SEA Ring and Standard Laboratory Tests 34
Figure 6. Overview of Water Column Toxicity Testing Approach with Both SEA Ring and
Standard Laboratory Tests 35
Figure 7. The SEA Ring verification testing will be conducted in 17-gallon HOPE containers
(Chem-Tainer Industries; left), with concurrent standardized laboratory testing using
glass beakers such as those shown at right 38
Figure 8. A Troll 9500 datasonde (In Situ, Inc.) will be used to continuously measure and record
water quality parameters in one of the SEA Ring exposure chambers associated with
each treatment type 43
TABLES
Table 1. Toxicity Test Methodology and QA/QC Requirements for Water Column Toxicity Tests
Using the Mysid Shrimp Americamysis bahia 25
Table 2. Toxicity Test Methodology and QA/QC Requirements for Water Column Toxicity Tests
Using TopsmeltAtherinops qffinis 26
Table 3. Toxicity Test Methodology and QA/QC Requirements for Solid-Phase Toxicity Tests
Using the Marine Amphipod Eohaustorius estuarius 27
Table 4. Toxicity Test Methodology and QA/QC Requirements for Solid-Phase Toxicity and
Bioaccumulation Tests Using the Marine Polychaete Neanthes arenaceodentata 28
Table 5. Test Methodology and QA/QC Requirements for 28-Day Bioaccumulation Tests Using
the Marine Clam Macoma nasuta 29
Table 6. Summary of Tests and Testing Frequency 39
Table 7. Test Methods and Equipment 44
Table 8. Summary of Data Recording Process 64
Table 9. Summary of Assessment Reports 68
-------
Sediment Ecotoxicity Assessment Ring
QAPP
Page 7 of 73
Version 1
May 16, 2012
A3 ACRONYMS AND ABBREVIATIONS
%D percent difference
ADQ audit of data quality
AMS Advanced Monitoring Systems
ANOVA analysis of variance
ASTM American Society for Testing and Materials
CAB Cellulose Acetate Butyrate
cc cubic centimeter
CCV continuing calibration verification
CETIS Comprehensive Environmental Toxicity Information System
COC chain-of-custody
Cu copper
DO dissolved oxygen
DQI data quality indicator
EPA U.S. Environmental Protection Agency
ERDC Engineer Research Development Center
ESTCP Environmental Security Technology Verification Program
ETV Environmental Technology Verification
GC gas chromatography
HOPE high density polyethylene
ICAL initial calibration
ICP-MS inductively coupled plasma mass spectrometry
ICV initial calibration verification
LC50 median lethal concentration
LCS laboratory control sample
LRB laboratory record book
MS Metals Contaminated Sediment
PAH polycyclic aromatic hydrocarbon
PCB polychlorinated biphenyl
PE performance evaluation
ppb parts per billion
ppm parts per million
ppt parts per thousand
PSNS Puget Sound Naval Shipyard
QA quality assurance
QAO quality assurance officer
-------
Sediment Ecotoxicity Assessment Ring
QAPP
Page 8 of 73
Version 1
May 16, 2012
QAPP quality assurance project plan
QC quality control
QMP Quality Management Plan
RMO Records Management Office
SEA Ring Sediment Ecotoxicity Assessment Ring
SED surficial sediment
SOP Standard Operating Procedure
SPAWAR Space and Naval Warfare
SSC SPAWAR Systems Center
SWI sediment water interface
TOC total organic carbon
TSA technical systems audit
UHMWPE Ultra-high molecular weight polyethylene
USAGE U.S. Army Corps of Engineers
VTC verification test coordinator
WC water column
YB Yaquina Bay, OR
-------
Sediment Ecotoxicity Assessment Ring
QAPP
Page 9 of 73
Version 1
May 16, 2012
A4 DISTRIBUTION LIST
Technology Representative
Gunther Rosen
SPAWAR Systems Center Pacific (SSC Pac)
Environmental Sciences and Applied Systems
Code 71751
53475 Strothe Rd., Bldg. Ill
San Diego, CA 92152
EPA
John McKernan, ScD, CIH
U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA)
National Risk Management Research Laboratory
26 W. Martin Luther King Dr.
Cincinnati, OH 45268
Verification Organization, Battelle
Ramona Darlington, PhD -
AMS Center Technology Verification Coordinator
Eric Stern - Research Leader/Sediment Management
Rosanna Buhl - Manager/Quality Systems
Amy Dindal - AMS Center Manager
Battelle
505 King Ave.
Columbus, OH 43201
Reference Laboratory
Patricia Tuminello
USAGE ERDC Chemistry Laboratory
3909 Halls Ferry Road
Vicksburg, MS 39180-6199
Dr. Jacob Stanley
USAGE ERDC, Environmental
Laboratory, Risk Assessment Branch
3909 Halls Ferry Road
Vicksburg, MS 39180-6199
Brandon Swope
SPAWAR SSC Pac Chemistry
Laboratory
53560 Hull Street
San Diego, CA 92152-5001
-------
Sediment Ecotoxicity Assessment Ring
QAPP
Page 10 of 73
Version 1
May 16, 2012
AS VERIFICATION TEST ORGANIZATION
The verification test will be conducted under the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA)
Environmental Technology Verification (ETV) Program. It will be performed by Battelle, which is
managing the ETV Advanced Monitoring Systems (AMS) Center through a cooperative agreement with
EPA. The scope of the AMS Center covers verification of monitoring technologies for contaminants and
natural species in air, water, soil and sediments. This verification test will evaluate an in-situ field
sampling technology that determines the toxicity of contaminants in the sediment and water column
(WC), and sediment-water interface on benthic and WC organisms.
The objective of the verification is to test the efficacy and ability of the Sediment Ecotoxicity Assessment
Ring (SEA Ring) to evaluate the toxicity of contaminants in the sediment, at the sediment-water interface,
and WC to organisms that live in those respective environments. The SEA Ring will improve the
assessment of exposure and response at Department of Defense contaminated sediment and surface water
sites to assist in making accurate and informed management decisions, particularly with respect to
assessment of sediment remedy effectiveness and time-varying exposures. Although the SEA Ring is
used in the field, the verification testing will focus on the ability of the SEA Ring to provide comparable
data (using quantitative and qualitative criteria) to traditional EPA and American Society for Testing and
Materials (ASTM)-approved laboratory methods under controlled laboratory conditions. The
performance parameters for this test are repeatability, comparability and reproducibility as well as a
number of operational factors defined in Section B.
The performance of the SEA Ring will be based on comparison with data obtained from EPA and ASTM
methods for determining the toxicity of contaminated sediment and whole effluents. Both the SEA Ring
exposures and the traditional laboratory exposures will be conducted in the laboratory. The test methods
will follow those described in standard guidance documents (EPA and USAGE, 1998; ASTM, 2000;
ASTM, 2010). Over approximately a two-month time period, all exposures will be conducted at the
Navy's Space and Naval Warfare (SPAWAR) Systems Center (SSC) Pacific Bioassay Laboratory,
San Diego, an Environmental Laboratory Accreditation Program certified laboratory. An external
laboratory, the U.S. Army Corps of Engineers (USAGE) Engineer Research Development Center
(ERDC), Vicksburg, MS, will be utilized for verification of sediment and tissue concentrations from
relevant test samples. The subject technology is concurrently being evaluated in a project sponsored
-------
Sediment Ecotoxicity Assessment Ring
QAPP
Page 11 of 73
Version 1
May 16, 2012
by the Environmental Security Technology Verification Program (ESTCP) Project ER-201130 titled
"Demonstration and Commercialization of the Sediment Ecosystem Assessment Protocol".
The day to day operations of this verification test will be coordinated and supervised by Battelle, with the
participation of the SEA Ring technology representative (SPAWAR). Battelle will conduct laboratory
testing of the SEA Ring technology at the SPAWAR Systems Center in San Diego, CA. SPAWAR will
provide the SEA Ring technology for testing and replicating multiple deployments of the technology, and
train Battelle staff on its use. Battelle staff and SPAWAR will operate the technology during verification
testing.
The organization chart in Figure 1 identifies the responsibilities of the organizations and individuals
associated with the verification test. Roles and responsibilities are defined further below. Quality
assurance (QA) oversight will be provided by the Battelle Quality Manager, and also by the EPA AMS
Center Quality Manager, at EPA's discretion.
A5.1 Battelle's Test Program Roles and Responsibility
Dr. Ramona Darlington is the AMS Center's Verification Test Coordinator (VTC) for this test. In this
role, Dr. Darlington will have overall responsibility for ensuring that the technical, scheduling, and cost
goals established for the verification test are met. Specifically, Dr. Darlington will:
Serve as the primary point of contact with SPAWAR;
Prepare the draft quality assurance project plan (QAPP), verification report, and verification
statement;
Revise the draft QAPP, verification report, and verification statement in response to
reviewers' comments;
Assemble a team of qualified technical staff to conduct the verification test;
Establish a budget for the verification test and manage staff to ensure the budget is not
exceeded;
Coordinate with the technology representative for provision of its technology for testing;
Coordinate with SPAWAR personnel for laboratory testing;
Direct the team in performing the verification test in accordance with this QAPP;
-------
Sediment Ecotoxicity Assessment Ring
QAPP
Page 12 of 73
Version 1
May 16, 2012
Battelle
Management
Battelle AMS Center
Quality Manager
Rosanna Buhl
Quality Assurance
Officer
Rosanna Buhl
AMS Center
Stakeholders
Battelle AMS
Center Manager
Amy Dindal
Verification Test
Coordinator
Ramona Darlington
Verification
Testing Leader
Eric Stern
US Navy SPAWAR
Technology
Representative
Gunther Rosen
Battelle Testing
Staff
Reference Laboratories
(SSC Pac Chemistry,
ERDC and SSC Pac
Bioassay Laboratory)
EPA AMS Center
Project Officer
John McKernan
EPA AMS Center
Quality Manager
Figure 1. Organizational Chart
Hold a kick-off meeting approximately one week prior to the start of the verification test to
review the technical, logistical, and administrative critical paths of the verification test.
Responsibility for each aspect of the verification test will be established by the VTC;
Ensure that all quality procedures specified in this EPA Quality Level III QAPP and in the
AMS Center Quality Management Plan (Battelle, 2011) are followed;
Ensure that confidentiality of sensitive technology information is maintained;
Assist SPAWAR as needed during verification testing;
Become familiar with the operation of the technology through instruction by SPAWAR;
Prepare a deviation report for any departure from the QAPP during the verification, obtain the
requisite EPA approvals, and distribute the approved report as specified in the AMS Center
Quality Management Plan (QMP);
-------
Sediment Ecotoxicity Assessment Ring
QAPP
Page 13 of 73
Version 1
May 16, 2012
Respond to any challenges raised in assessment reports, audits, or from test staff
observations, and institute corrective actions as necessary; and
Coordinate distribution of the final QAPP, verification reports, and verification statements.
Ms. Amy Dindal is Battelle's Manager for the AMS Center. As such, Ms. Dindal will oversee the various
stages of verification testing. Ms. Dindal will:
Review the draft and final QAPP;
Attend the verification test kick-off meeting;
Review the draft and final verification report and verification statement;
Ensure that necessary Battelle resources, including staff and facilities, are committed to the
verification test;
Maintain communication with EPA's technical and quality managers; and
Issue a stop work order if Battelle or EPA QA staff discovers adverse or non-consistent
findings that are derived from technology failure or physical deployment conditions that will
compromise test results.
Technical staff from Battelle, including Mr. Eric Stern, will support Dr. Darlington in planning and
conducting the verification test. The responsibilities of the technical staff will be to:
Assist Dr. Darlington (VTC) in preparing the QAPP;
Review the draft and final QAPP;
Attend the verification test kick-off meeting;
Ensure that confidentiality of sensitive vendor information is maintained;
Support Dr. Darlington in responding to issues raised in assessment reports and audits;
and
Review the draft and final verification reports and verification statements.
Ms. Rosanna Buhl is Battelle's QA Manager for the AMS Center. Ms. Buhl will:
Review the draft and final QAPP;
Delegate to other Battelle quality staff any Quality Assurance Officer (QAO) responsibilities
assigned below as needed to meet project schedules;
Review and approve QAPPs, QAPP amendments, deviations and audit reports;
Work with the VTC and Battelle's AMS Center Manager to resolve data quality concerns and
disputes; and
-------
Sediment Ecotoxicity Assessment Ring
QAPP
Page 14 of 73
Version 1
May 16, 2012
Recommend a stop work order if audits indicate that data quality or safety is being
compromised.
Ms. Buhl will also be the QAO for this test. In this capacity she will:
Attend the verification test kick-off meeting and lead the discussion of the QA elements of
the meeting checklist;
Prior to the start of verification testing, verify the presence of applicable training records,
including any training on test equipment/technologies;
Conduct a technical systems audit (TSA) at least once during the verification test;
Conduct audits to verify data quality;
Prepare and distribute an audit report for each audit;
Verify that audit responses for each audit finding and observation are appropriate and that
corrective action has been implemented effectively;
Communicate to the VTC and/or technical staff the need for immediate corrective action if an
audit identifies QAPP deviations or practices that threaten data quality;
Provide a summary of the QA/quality control (QC) activities and results for the verification
reports;
Review the draft and final verification report and verification statement; and
Communicate data quality concerns to the VTC.
A5.2 Technology Representative
The technology representative is US Navy SPAWAR. Mr. Gunther Rosen is the Navy's representative
and point of contact. The technology was developed and patented by SPAWAR and the University of
Michigan. A commercial technology vendor, Zebra-Tech, Ltd., is supporting SPAWAR in an effort
(funded by ESTCP) towards commercialization and standardization of the hardware and approach,
respectively. As part of the ESTCP project technology transition goals, the verified prototype of the
technology will ultimately be made commercially available through Zebra-Tech, or another vendor,
depending on who pursues licensing rights. The responsibilities of the technology representative are:
Review and provide comments on the draft QAPP;
Accept (by signature) the final QAPP prior to test initiation;
Participate in the kick-off meeting for the verification test;
-------
Sediment Ecotoxicity Assessment Ring
QAPP
Page 15 of 73
Version 1
May 16, 2012
Provide two SEA Ring technologies to carry out comparative analysis during the verification
test;
Supply instructions on the use of the technology, and written consent for test staff to carry out
verification testing; and
Review and provide comments on the draft verification report and verification statement for
their respective technology.
A5.3 EPA
EPA's responsibilities in the AMS Center are based on the requirements stated in the Environmental
Technology Verification Program Quality Management Plan (EPA, 2008). The roles of specific EPA
staff are as follows.
The EPA's AMS Center Quality Manager will:
Review the draft QAPP;
Perform one external TSA during the verification test, at EPA's discretion;
Notify the EPA AMS Center Project Officer of the need for a stop work order if the external
audit indicates that data quality is being compromised;
Prepare and distribute an assessment report summarizing results of any external audits; and
Review draft verification report and verification statement.
Dr. John McKernan is EPA's Project Officer for the AMS Center. Dr. McKernan will:
Review the draft QAPP;
Approve the final QAPP;
Review and approve deviations to the approved final QAPP;
Appoint a delegate to review and approve deviations to the approved final QAPP in
his absence, in order that testing progress will not be delayed;
Review the first day of data from the verification test and provide immediate
comments if concerns are identified;
Review the draft verification report and verification statement;
Oversee the EPA review process for the QAPP, verification report, and verification
statement; and
-------
Sediment Ecotoxicity Assessment Ring
QAPP
Page 16 of 73
Version 1
May 16, 2012
Coordinate the submission of verification reports and verification statements for final EPA
approval.
A5.4 Verification Test Stakeholders
This QAPP and the verification report and verification statement based on testing described in this
document will be reviewed by experts in the fields related to aquatic sediment toxicity and
bioaccumulation (bioassay) sampling and testing. The following experts have been providing input to
this QAPP and have agreed to provide a peer review.
Marc Greenberg, PhD - EPA Environmental Response Team, Edison, NJ
Guilherme Lotufo, PhD - ERDC, Vicksburg, MS
Damn Greenstein - Southern California Coastal Water Research Project, Costa Mesa, CA
The responsibilities of verification test stakeholders and/or peer reviewers include:
Participate in technical panel discussions (when available) to provide input to the test design;
Review and provide input to the draft QAPP; and
Review and provide input to the verification report/verification statement.
In addition, this technology category was reviewed with the broader AMS Center Stakeholder
Committees during the regular stakeholder teleconferences. Toxicity testing has been a long-standing
priority area for the AMS Center, with verifications and/or protocols completed in the areas of drinking
water, wastewater, and soil toxicity. This sediment toxicity technology verification was discussed with
the EPA Project Officer in May 2011.
A5.5 Reference Laboratories
Two reference laboratories will be utilized for verification of test exposures and/or bioaccumulated
concentrations of selected contaminant classes. The responsibilities of the reference laboratories for this
verification test include:
Acknowledging receipt of samples and completing the chain-of-custody (COC) forms for the
samples;
Analyzing all samples for copper (Cu) (SPAWAR) or polychlorinated biphenyl (PCB)
congeners (ERDC);
Providing analysis results and supporting laboratory documentation within 30 days of receipt
-------
Sediment Ecotoxicity Assessment Ring
QAPP
Page 17 of 73
Version 1
May 16, 2012
of samples; and
Providing documentation as requested (such as Standard Operating Procedures [SOPs]) for an
independent TSA of laboratory procedures.
The SSC Pacific Chemistry Laboratory will analyze seawater samples to verify control and spiked
samples for Cu. The SSC Pacific Laboratory technical point of contact for Cu measurements will be
Brandon Swope. He is responsible for providing SOPs and appropriate QA reporting for the verification
test. In lieu of participating in the performance evaluation (PE) audit, the SSC Laboratory will provide
results from its two most recent Cu PE samples to the Battelle Quality Manager. SOPs will be obtained
and reviewed from the external laboratory.
The USAGE, ERDC Environmental Chemistry Lab, in Vicksburg, MS, will analyze sediment and tissue
samples from the technology representative for PCB congener measurements. Ms. Patricia Tuminello
will be the point of contact at ERDC. She is responsible for providing SOPs and appropriate QA
reporting for the verification test. The ERDC laboratory will participate in a PE audit (see Section C1.1)
since the laboratory is not accredited.
-------
Sediment Ecotoxicity Assessment Ring
QAPP
Page 18 of 73
Version 1
May 16, 2012
A6 BACKGROUND
A6.1 Technology Need
The ETV Program's AMS Center conducts third-party performance testing of commercially available
technologies that detect or monitor natural species or contaminants in air, water, soil, and sediment. The
purpose of ETV is to provide objective and quality assured performance data on environmental
technologies so that users, developers, regulators, and consultants can make informed decisions about
purchasing and applying these technologies. Stakeholder committees of buyers and users of such
technologies recommend technology categories, and technologies within those categories become
priorities for testing. Among the technology categories recommended for testing are toxicity testing
technologies, including sediment and aqueous toxicity for assessment of environmental quality in marine,
freshwater and estuarine systems.
Traditionally, the bioavailability and toxicity of contaminated sediments or water samples are assessed on
grab or composite samples collected in the field and tested in a laboratory. In the laboratory, test
organisms are added to site sediment or water samples in beakers and exposed under controlled
conditions (e.g., temperature, pH, salinity, photoperiod, feeding regime, aeration) for a specified time
period (e.g., EPA, 1994a; EPA, 2000; ASTM, 2000; ASTM, 2010). This laboratory-based method of
assessing sediment quality, although widely used and well established, does not necessarily represent the
true in-situ exposure and effects to organisms in the field. This is especially true when the source of
contamination is ephemeral, meaning exposure varies over time and with ambient conditions. Another
challenge with laboratory testing is that sediment sample manipulation removes the natural vertical
contaminant stratification, which in turn alters the exposure to test organisms. Such manipulation may
also result in alteration of the contaminant bioavailability through processes including degradation,
volatilization, and redox changes. Sediment samples removed from the field undergo physical and
chemical changes which change the bioavailability and toxicity of the contaminants and may lead to
misleading results in the laboratory and subsequent difficulty in program decision making.
In addition, laboratory tests may overestimate toxicity from sediment-associated contaminants due to
buildup of contaminant concentrations in the overlying water as toxicants desorb from the sediment into
the WC. In aqueous exposures, laboratory tests may also misrepresent actual exposure in the field when
static exposures are used as a means of assessing the potential for adverse effects of a time-varying
-------
Sediment Ecotoxicity Assessment Ring
QAPP
Page 19 of 73
Version 1
May 16, 2012
stressor (e.g., stormwater runoff, combined sewer overflow, etc.). The limitations of standard laboratory
toxicity testing and chemical analyses lead to potentially inappropriate and costly management decisions.
A6.2 SEA Ring Technology Description
The SEA Ring (U.S. Patent No. 8,011,239) is an integrated, versatile, field tested, toxicity and
bioavailability assessment device. Figures 2 and 3 show top and side views of the patented, first
generation version of the SEA Ring technology. The second generation model (Figure 4) will be the
version used in this ETV verification. The second generation system is the commercialized version of the
prototype, which was designed to be more user-friendly, more autonomous, and more rigorous to
withstand environmental conditions over exposure time. The unit consists of 10 cylindrical chambers
fixed to a circular ultra-high molecular weight polyethylene (UHMWPE) platform. The top end of each
chamber is fitted with an integrated, multifunctional cap. The cap includes both overlying water intake
and outlet ports, and an organism delivery port (opening for an optional modified plastic 30 cubic
centimeter [cc] syringe). The intake port connects to a peristaltic pump that is housed in the center of the
device and powered by rechargeable batteries stored in a separate housing underneath the pump. The
pump is programmable to provide chamber water volume exchange at a rate (range ~6 to >25 turnovers
per day) desired for the site- or project-specific preferences.
The SEA Ring was designed to evaluate toxicity in the WC, sediment water interface (SWI), and/or
surficial sediment (SED; Figure 3). The SED chambers are open on the bottom, are 10 inches in length,
2.75 inches in diameter, and extend 5 inches below the base of the system. Small sediment dwelling
organisms can be introduced into the SED chambers through the organism delivery port built into the cap
with a modified 30 cc plastic syringe. The syringe is plugged with a silicone stopper inside the test
chamber to retain the organisms until desired release. For larger organisms a 1A inch stainless steel mesh
is integrated into the bottom opening of the exposure chamber, allowing organisms to be preloaded prior
to deployment. The WC and SWI chambers are 5 inches in length, 2.75 inches in diameter, and have a
closed bottom. The bottom consists of a solid plastic polyethylene cap or mesh insert for water quality
chambers. Organisms for the WC and SWI tests can be loaded in the laboratory or in the field
immediately prior to deployment. In the center of the circular platform there is a custom-built peristaltic
pump and battery. These components are fully encased and water tight. The intake to the test chambers
is located on top of the cap. Each inlet is directly connected to the pump through individual tubes that
pass over the pump roller. As the pump rotor turns, compressing and releasing pressure on the tubing,
ambient water from the surrounding area is circulated through each chamber. A water quality sensor or
-------
Sediment Ecotoxicity Assessment Ring
QAPP
Page 20 of 73
Version 1
May 16, 2012
passive sampler can also be attached to one of the chambers (Figure 3). Water quality sensors are used to
measure a variety of physical parameters including pH, temperature, depth, salinity, conductivity, and
dissolved oxygen (DO) from inside the exposure chambers.
~--39
Figure 2. Schematic of SEA Ring Technology
(U.S. Patent Number 7,758,813)
-------
Sediment Ecotoxicity Assessment Ring
QAPP
Page 21 of 73
Version 1
May 16, 2012
Overlying
Water
*. v
v
,
Sediment
Water
Interface
1
0
9 ฐ .
n 9 ฐ
>
*
s ire
4
" Surface Passive
Sediment Sampler
1
\^
1-
Figure 3. Multiple Lines of Evidence Use of SEA Ring Technology
Figure 4. Second Generation SEA Ring Device (left). Field Evaluation in Beach Deployment
(right)
-------
Sediment Ecotoxicity Assessment Pang
QAPP
Page 22 of 73
Version 1
May 16, 2012
A7 VERIFICATION TEST DESCRIPTION AND SCHEDULE
The purpose of the test is to generate performance data on an innovative in-situ field technology for
assessing contaminated sediment and WC toxicity and bioaccumulation potential using indigenous
organisms. The ease of use and comparability of the technology to EPA and ASTM methods will be
evaluated utilizing multiple species, varied sediment types, and chemicals often identified as
contaminants of concern (e.g., metals such as Cu and organics such as PCBs) in the near-shore aquatic
environment. The data generated from this verification test are intended to provide technology users with
information on its performance in controlled laboratory settings prior to its use in the field.
A7.1 Verification Test Description
The purpose of this QAPP is to specify procedures for verification testing of the SEA Ring to assess
contaminated sediment and WC toxicity to aquatic and benthic organisms. The primary evaluation will
assess survival, growth, and bioaccumulation of contaminants in aquatic and benthic organisms exposed
in the SEA Ring compared to responses achieved in the laboratory using standard ASTM and EPA
methods. In performing the verification test, Battelle will follow the technical and QA procedures
specified in this QAPP, and will comply with the data quality requirements in the AMS Center QMP
(Battelle, 2011).
The SEA Ring tests will be evaluated on the following performance parameters, described in detail in
Section B:
Repeatability;
Comparability;
Reproducibility; and
Operational factors (qualitative assessment).
Operational parameters including ease of use, training and sustainability (sampling time, waste produced,
and the amount of protective equipment required by the individual operating the technology) will also be
evaluated by Battelle staff. More details on the test design are provided in Section B.I.3.
Testing will be conducted in the laboratory over a two-month period by Battelle staff with support from
the technology representative. SEA Ring and concurrent bench-top tests following the EPA and ASTM
methods will be set up and evaluated in the SSC Pacific Bioassay Laboratory. With the exception of PCB
-------
Sediment Ecotoxicity Assessment Ring
QAPP
Page 23 of 73
Version 1
May 16, 2012
congener analyses in sediment and tissue by USAGE ERDC Chemistry Laboratory, all analyses will be
performed at the SSC Pacific Bioassay Laboratory.
Subsequent to verification testing, Battelle will prepare one Verification Report for the laboratory
evaluations. The report will describe the SEA Ring performance on assessing sediment and WC toxicity
to aquatic and benthic organisms.
QA procedures include a TSA and two audits of data quality (ADQs), (details provided in Section A7.1).
The Battelle QAO or her designee will perform the TSA. The first data set will be delivered within 30
days of test initiation. Un-audited data will include the disclaimer have not been reviewed by Battelle QA
Manager. The first ADQ will review the first data set delivered. The second ADQ will assess the
remainder of the data, the draft report, and the verification statement as described in Section C.
A7.2 Verification Test Schedule
Laboratory testing of the SEA Ring is scheduled to begin in November 2012 and will be initiated upon final
EPA and technology representative approval of this QAPP. Testing will occur over approximately a two-
month period. Data will be evaluated and the verification report and verification statement will be
drafted. It is anticipated that the final EPA-approved verification report and verification statement will be
completed by September 2013.
A7.3 Verification Location
Laboratory testing will be conducted at the SSC Pacific Bioassay Laboratory, San Diego, CA. This
laboratory is equipped to perform sediment and aqueous toxicity testing in a controlled environment and
reduces the costs of shipping the technology to the Battelle laboratory in Columbus, Ohio.
-------
Sediment Ecotoxicity Assessment Ring
QAPP
Page 24 of 73
Version 1
May 16, 2012
A8 QUALITY OBJECTIVES
This verification test is designed to evaluate the performance of the SEA Ring for determining the
bioavailability and toxicity of contaminants in water and sediments on aquatic and benthic organisms.
This verification will vary sediment type, organism and toxicity endpoint type, and contaminant
concentration in the SEA Ring device under controlled and repeatable test conditions. Parallel standard
bench-top tests will be conducted. Both the SEA Ring and bench-top tests will follow EPA and ASTM
testing methods, with minor modifications as necessary. Any deviations from protocols referenced will
be thoroughly documented on bench datasheets and in the final report. The test conditions and quality
indicators for this verification test lie in the performance parameters and the QC samples. Data quality
indicators (DQIs) ensure that the verification tests provide suitable data for a robust evaluation of
performance. DQIs have been established for organism age and water quality. The DQIs were
established to ensure that data used to support the SEA Ring technology tests are of sufficient quality.
Acceptance criteria for the DQIs and QC samples are detailed in the Tables 1 through 5, and are specific
to each test species.
-------
Sediment Ecotoxicity Assessment Ring
QAPP
Page 25 of 73
Version 1
May 16, 2012
Table 1. Toxicity Test Methodology and QA/QC Requirements for Water Column Toxicity Tests
Using the Mysid Shrimp Americamysis bahia
Test organism
Test organism source
Test organism age at initiation
Test duration; endpoint
Test solution renewal
Feeding
Test chamber
Test solution volume
Test temperature
Dilution water
Salinity
Test concentrations
Number of organisms/chamber
Number of replicates
Photoperiod
Aeration
Test Protocol
Test acceptability objective
Reference toxicant
Mysid shrimp -Americamysis bahia
Aquatic BioSystems - Laboratory culture (Fort Collins, CO)
3-5 days post-hatch; less than or equal to 24-h range in age (required)
96-hour; survival
80% volume renewal one time (48 hours)
Artemia nauplii, twice daily
0.5-L plastic cup (laboratory); 5 inch cellulose acetate butyrate (CAB) core tube
(SEA Ring)
Approximately 500 mL (laboratory and SEA Ring)
20 ฑ 1ฐC test-wide mean, 20 ฑ 3ฐC instantaneous
Filtered (0.45 um) natural seawater collected from near the mouth of San Diego
Bay at SSC Pacific Laboratory
32ฑ2%ppt
Lab control, 100, 200, 400 ug/L Cu
10
16 hours light/8 hours dark., ambient laboratory lighting
None, unless DO < 4 mg/L
EPA-821-R-02-012 (EPA, 2002a)
> 90 % mean survival in natural seawater control
Copper sulfate (Standard EPA laboratory method only); five concentrations (3
replicates each)
-------
Sediment Ecotoxicity Assessment Ring
QAPP
Page 26 of 73
Version 1
May 16, 2012
Table 2. Toxicity Test Methodology and QA/QC Requirements for Water Column Toxicity Tests
Using TopsmeltAtherinops affinis
Test organism
Test organism source
Test organism age at initiation
Test duration; endpoint
Test solution renewal
Feeding
Test chamber
Test solution volume
Test temperature
Salinity
Dilution water
Test concentrations
Number of organisms/chamber
Number of replicates
Photoperiod
Aeration
Test Protocol
Test acceptability objective
Reference toxicant
Topsmelt -Atherinops affinis
Aquatic BioSystems - Laboratory culture (Fort Collins, CO)
9-15 days post-hatch
96-hour; survival
80% volume renewal at 48 hours
Artemia nauplii, twice daily
0.5-L plastic cup (laboratory); 5 inch CAB core tube (SEA Ring)
Approximately 500 mL (laboratory and SEA Ring)
20 ฑ 1ฐC test-wide mean, 20 ฑ 3ฐC instantaneous
32ฑ2%ppt
Filtered (0.45 um) natural seawater collected from near the mouth of San Diego
Bay at SSC Pacific Laboratory
Lab control, 100, 200, 400 ug/L Cu
10
5
16 hours light/8 hours dark, ambient laboratory lighting
None, unless D.O. < 4 mg/L
EPA-821-R-02-012 (EPA, 2002a)
> 90 % mean survival in natural seawater control
Copper sulfate (standard EPA lab method only); 96 hours, 48-hr renewal/five
concentrations (3 replicates each)
-------
Sediment Ecotoxicity Assessment Ring
QAPP
Page 27 of 73
Version 1
May 16, 2012
Table 3. Toxicity Test Methodology and QA/QC Requirements for Solid-Phase Toxicity Tests
Using the Marine Amphipod Eohaustorius estuarius
Test organism
Test organism source
Test organism age at initiation
Control sediment source
Test duration; endpoint
Test solution renewal
Feeding
Test chamber
Test sediment depth
Overlying water volume
Test temperature
Overlying water
Salinity
Test concentrations
Number of organisms/chamber
Number of replicates
Photoperiod
Aeration
Test Protocol
Test acceptability objective
Reference toxicant
Marine Amphipod - Eohaustorius estuarius
Northwest Aquatic Sciences (Newport, OR)
NA - Field collected (3-5 mm adult)
Sediment from amphipod collection site, Yaquina Bay, OR (YB)
10 days; survival
None
None
1-L glass jar (lab), 10 inch CAB core tube (SEA Ring)
2 cm (lab and SEA Ring)
750 ml (lab and SEA Ring) natural seawater
18 ฑ PC test-wide mean, 18 ฑ 3ฐC instantaneous
Filtered (0.45 um) natural seawater collected from near the mouth of San Diego
Bay at SSC Pacific Laboratory
32ฑ2%ppt
Undiluted sediment sieved to < 2.0 mm
20
5 (lab and SEA Ring)
Continuous light (24 hr), ambient laboratory lighting
Laboratory filtered air, continuous (1-2 bubbles per second delivered through a
Pasteur pipette in laboratory beaker, 1-2 bubbles per second from three Pasteur
pipettes in SEA Ring Chemtainer (outside exposure chambers)
EPA 600-R-94-025 (EPA, 1994a)
> 90 percent mean survival in control
Cadmium chloride (standard EPA lab method only); 96-h water only exposure
-------
Sediment Ecotoxicity Assessment Ring
QAPP
Page 28 of 73
Version 1
May 16, 2012
Table 4. Toxicity Test Methodology and QA/QC Requirements for Solid-Phase Toxicity and
Bioaccumulation Tests Using the Marine Polychaete Neanthes arenaceodentata
Test organism
Test organism source
Test organism age at initiation
Control sediment source
Test duration; endpoint(s)
Test solution renewal
Feeding
Test chamber
Sediment depth
Overlying water volume
Test temperature
Overlying water
Salinity
Test concentrations
Number of organisms/chamber
Number of replicates
Photoperiod
Aeration
Test Protocol
Test acceptability objective
Reference toxicant
Marine polychaete, Neanthes arenaceodentata
Dr. Mary AnnRempel Hester, Aquatic Toxicity Support, Inc. (Bremerton, WA)
2 weeks
Sediment from the amphipod collection site, Yaquina Bay, OR (YB)
28 days; survival and growth
Twice-weekly (laboratory jar/SEA Ring Chemtainer)
1 ml of flake food slurry twice weekly after test solution renewal (slurry
comprised of 100 mL seawater: 1 g Tetraminฎ fish feed)
1-L glass jar (lab), 10 inch CAB core tube (SEA Ring)
2 cm
750 ml
18 ฑ 1ฐC test-wide mean, 18 ฑ 3ฐC instantaneous
Filtered (0.45 um) natural seawater collected from near the mouth of San Diego
Bay at SSC Pacific Laboratory
32ฑ2%ppt
Undiluted sediment sieved to < 2.0 mm
20
16 hours light/8 hours dark, ambient laboratory lighting
Laboratory filtered air, continuous (1-2 bubbles per second delivered through a
Pasteur pipette in laboratory beaker, 1-2 bubbles per second from three Pasteur
pipettes in SEA Ring Chemtainer (outside exposure chambers)
ASTM 2000 E1611-00
> 90 percent mean survival in control
Copper Sulfate (standard ASTM laboratory method only); 96-hr water only
exposure
-------
Sediment Ecotoxicity Assessment Ring
QAPP
Page 29 of 73
Version 1
May 16, 2012
Table 5. Test Methodology and QA/QC Requirements for 28-Day Bioaccumulation Tests Using the
Marine Clam Macoma nasuta
Test organisms
Test organism source
Test organism age at initiation
Control sediment source
Test duration
Test solution renewal
Feeding
Test chamber
Sediment depth
Overlying water volume
Test temperature
Overlying water
Salinity
Test concentrations
Number of organisms/chamber
Number of replicates
Photoperiod
Aeration
Test Protocol
Test acceptability objective
Reference toxicant
Marine clamMaco/wa nasuta
Brezina & Associates (Dillon Beach, CA)
~1" Small Adult (field collected)
Sediment collected from clam collection site, Dillon Beach, CA (DB)
28 days, + 24-hr depuration period
Three-times weekly with clean seawater
None
5 1-L glass beakers in 10 gallon aquarium (lab); 5 1-L CAB core tubes in
Chemtainer (SEA Ring)
5 cm (lab and SEA Ring chambers)
Approximately 750 mL (laboratory and SEA Ring)
18 ฑ 3 ฐC instantaneous
Filtered (0.45 um) natural seawater (salinity 32-34 ppt) collected from near the
mouth of San Diego Bay at SSC Pacific Laboratory
32 ฑ2% ppt
Undiluted sediment sieved to <2.0 mm
16 hours light/8 hours dark, ambient laboratory lighting
Laboratory filtered air, continuous (1-2 bubbles per second delivered through a
Pasteur pipette in laboratory beaker, 1-2 bubbles per second from three Pasteur
pipettes in SEA Ring Chemtainer (outside exposure chambers)
EPA 503/8-91/001, ASTME-1688-10
> 90 percent mean survival in controls
None
-------
Sediment Ecotoxicity Assessment Ring
QAPP
Page 30 of 73
Version 1
May 16, 2012
A9 SPECIAL TRAINING/CERTIFICATION
Documentation of training related to technology testing, field testing, data analysis, and reporting is
maintained for all Battelle technical staff in training files at their respective locations. SPAWAR staff
will receive training in documentation and records management procedures required for ETV testing
during the kick-off meeting. The Battelle Quality Manager will verify the presence of appropriate
training records prior to the start of testing. Battelle and EPA staff involved in this verification will be
specifically trained on the operation of the SEA Ring technology. Training in the use of the SEA Ring
will be conducted by the technology representative. Battelle will document this training with a consent
form, signed and dated by the technology vendor, which states which Battelle technical staff have been
trained to use the technology and can train other staff to do so as well. In the event that other staff
members are required to use the technology, they will be trained by either the operators that were trained
by the technology representative or the technology representative.
-------
Sediment Ecotoxicity Assessment Ring
QAPP
Page 31 of 73
Version 1
May 16, 2012
A10 DOCUMENTATION AND RECORDS
The documents for this verification test will include the QAPP, vendor instructions, reference methods,
verification reports, verification statements, and audit reports. The project records will include laboratory
record books (LRBs) and data collection forms, supporting laboratory records, training records, electronic
files (both raw data and spreadsheets), and QA audit files. Section BIO summarizes data management for
the test and the types of data to be recorded. Documentation of Battelle staff training by the technology
representative and copies of other project specific training will also be included in the project files. All of
these records will be maintained by the SPAWAR point of contact during the test, and will be transferred
to permanent storage at Batte lie's Records Management Office (RMO) at the conclusion of the
verification test. All Battelle LRBs are stored indefinitely with the project files by Battelle's RMO.
Section BIO further details the data management practices and responsibilities.
All data generated during this project will be recorded directly, promptly, and legibly in ink. All data
entries will be dated on the date of entry, and signed or initialed by the person entering the data. Any
changes in entries will be made so as not to obscure the original entry, will be dated and signed or
initialed at the time of the change and will indicate the reason for the change. Project specific data forms
will be developed prior to testing to ensure that all critical information is documented in real time. The
draft forms will be provided to the Battelle QA Manager for review.
-------
Sediment Ecotoxicity Assessment Ring
QAPP
Page 32 of 73
Version 1
May 16, 2012
SECTION B
MEASUREMENT AND DATA ACQUISITION
Bl EXPERIMENTAL DESIGN
This QAPP addresses the verification of the SEA Ring through laboratory testing. Specifically, the SEA
Ring will be evaluated for the following performance parameters:
Repeatability;
Comparability;
Intra-unit reproducibility; and
Operational factors.
The verification test will be conducted in the laboratory over a period of two months. Prior to initiation of
the SEA Ring verification test, sediment samples will be collected for use in the experiment and testing
organisms obtained from vendors. Collection records will include the collection date and location,
collector and storage conditions. Test organism records will include the source, date and location of
collection (if collected) or age (if cultured), and holding and acclimation conditions.
Bl.l Test Procedures
The following sections describe the test procedures that will be used to evaluate each of the performance
parameters listed above. Cost information will be provided by the technology vendor (i.e., price of
technology, operation and maintenance cost). The performance parameters are defined in detail in Tables
1 through 5. Figure 5 illustrates the sediment test design variables, and the WC test design is shown in
Figure 6.
Bl.1.1 Sediment and Water Sources. Three different types of sediment will be used in the ETV
verification of the SEA Ring. The laboratory water used by SSC Pacific Laboratory is 0.45 (im filtered
seawater collected from near the mouth of San Diego Bay on an incoming high tide, and has been used
successfully for a number of years to conduct toxicity testing that regularly meets test acceptability
criteria for a number of different standardized laboratory tests. The laboratory seawater will be used as
the overlying water for sediment tests and as the dilution water for aqueous tests.
-------
Sediment Ecotoxicity Assessment Ring
QAPP
Page 3 3 of 73
Version 1
May 16, 2012
Control Sediment (YB or DB): Sediment from Yaquina Bay, OR (referred to as YB) will be used as the
control sediment for testing with E. estuarius and N. arenaceodentata. Yaquina Bay sand is commonly
used as a negative control in West Coast marine sediment toxicity testing. This sand will be obtained
from Northwestern Aquatic Sciences (Newport, OR), which also collects E. estuarius from the same
location for sediment toxicity testing. Sediment from Dillon Beach, CA (referred to as DB) will be used
as the control sediment forM nasuta. This sediment is from the clam collection site and is more
organically rich and more suitable forM nasuta.
Metals Contaminated Sediment (MS): A fine-grained marine sediment from an undisclosed
(proprietary) site, contaminated primarily with Cu, zinc, and lead (referred to as MS) will be used for
toxicity testing only. Chemical analysis of this sediment will be performed as part of the test design.
PCB Contaminated Sediment (PSNS): A medium-fine grained field sediment from the Puget Sound
Naval Shipyard in Bremerton, WA (referred to as PSNS) that is contaminated with numerous classes of
chemicals will be used for both toxicity and bioaccumulation testing. With the exception of PCBs,
concentrations of other contaminants in this sediment are not expected to be at toxic levels. Historical
data on the chemical profile of this material will be obtained. In addition, PCB, total organic carbon
(TOC), and grain size analysis of this sediment will be performed as part of the test design.
The MS and PSNS sediments are already in storage (4 ฑ 2 ฐC, in the dark) at the SSC Pacific Laboratory.
Before being introduced into the test chambers, the sediments will be re-homogenized and sieved to < 2.0
mm to remove shell hash and other indigenous material from interfering with the laboratory bioassays.
The solids content (percent solids), initial TOC concentration, and percentage of silt and clay sized
particles will be measured by ERDC.
Laboratory Dilution Water: The laboratory dilution water used by SSC Pacific Laboratory is 0.45 (im
filtered seawater collected from near the mouth of San Diego Bay on an incoming high tide, and has been
used for a number of years in successful toxicity testing that meets test acceptability criteria for a number
of different standardized laboratory tests. The laboratory dilution water will be used as the overlying
water for sediment tests and as the dilution water for aqueous tests.
-------
Sediment Ecotoxicity Assessment Ring
QAPP
Page 34 of 73
Version 1
May 16, 2012
Sediment Test - SEA Ring
YB Control Sediment
YB Control Sediment Polychaete(20) - 28 days
Amphipod (20) -10 days DB Control Sediment
Clam (3)-28 days
MS Sediment -Toxlclty
Amphipod(20) -10 days
Polychaete (20) - 28 days
PSNS -Toxicity/Bioaccum
Amphipod(20) -10 days
PSNS- Toxicity/Bioaccum
Polychaete (20) - 28 days
Clam (3)- 28 days
Sediment Test - Laboratory
Yaquina Bay - Control - Amphipod (20) - 10 days
Yaquina Bay - Control - Polychaete (20) - 28 days
Dillon Beach - Control - Clam (3) - 28 days
( MS Sediment -Toxicity - Amphipod (20) - 10 days
MS Sediment -Toxicity - Polychaete (20) - 28 days
PSNS Sediment-Toxicity & PCB Bioaccumulation - Amphipod(20) -10 days |
PSNS Sediment-Toxicity & PCB Bioaccumulation - Polychaete (20) - 28 days I
PSNS Sediment-Toxicity & PCB Bioaccumulation -Clam (3) -28 days
Figure 5. Overview of Sediment Toxicity and Bioaccumulation Testing Approach with Both SEA
Ring and Standard Laboratory Tests
(Number of test organisms per replicate in parentheses).
-------
Sediment Ecotoxicity Assessment Ring
QAPP
Page 3 5 of 73
Version 1
May 16, 2012
Water Column Toxicity Test - SEA Ring
0 ppb - Control
Mysid shrimp (10) &
Topsmelt(lO)
100 ppb-Copper
Mysid shrimp (10) &
Topsmelt(lO)
200 ppb-Copper
Mysid shrimp (10) &
Topsmelt(lO)
400 ppb-Copper
Mysid shrimp (10) &
Topsmelt(lO)
Repeat the 0% and 400 ppb for Repeatability Test
Water Column Toxicity Test - Laboratory
0 ppb - Control - Mysid shrimp (10) & Topsmelt (10)
100 ppb - Copper - Mysid shrimp (10) & Topsmelt (10)
200 ppb -Copper- Mysid shrimp (10) & Topsmelt (10)
400 ppb-Copper- Mysid shrimp (10) & Topsmelt (10)
All treatments in replicates of 5, number of organisms per chamber = 10
Figure 6. Overview of Water Column Toxicity Testing Approach with Both SEA Ring and
Standard Laboratory Tests
(Number of test organisms per replicate is in parentheses)
Copper Spiking for Water Column Tests: Laboratory dilution water will be spiked with three
concentrations of Cu, bracketing the expected median lethal concentration (LC50) for each of the two WC
tests species. Concentrations of Cu to be tested are 100, 200, and 400 parts per billion (ppb) as Cu. The
appropriate amount of Cu will be added to laboratory dilution water using a 1,000 parts per million (ppm)
verified stock solution made from reagent grade copper sulfate (CuSO4). Organisms will be loaded into
one of four SEA Rings as depicted in Figure 6 and each ring will be exposed to a different Cu
concentration.
Bl.1.2 Benthic and Aquatic Organism Collection. Depending on availability, up to five different
types of organisms will be used in this ETV verification test. For sediment tests, three organisms will be
-------
Sediment Ecotoxicity Assessment Ring
QAPP
Page 36 of 73
Version 1
May 16, 2012
used: a free burrowing deposit feeder (the marine amphipod, Eohaustorius estuarius), a deposit feeding
tube building organism (the marine polychaete worm, Neanthes arenaceodentata), and a facultative filter
feeding clam (the bent-nosed clam, Macoma nasutd). Survivors from each test species will be analyzed
for PCB congeners from the PSNS sediment treatments, following test termination and a depuration
period (overnight) in uncontaminated seawater. All replicates from one organism will be analyzed for
PCB congeners in the YB control sediment. Only one organism will be analyzed because it is expected
that there will be no PCB congener detections in the control sediment organisms.
Two common west coast marine test organisms will be used for the WC tests depending on their
availability: Americamysis bahia (mysid shrimp) and Atherinops affinis (Pacific topsmelt). An alternative
vertebrate species, the inland silverside minnow Menidia beryllina, may be used should topsmelt not be
available.
The age/size and source information for the proposed test organisms is provided in Tables 1 through 5.
All test organisms will be acclimated to laboratory exposure conditions at the SSC Pacific Laboratory for
1 to 5 days prior to use, depending on species. Acclimation time will be taken into account when the
animals are ordered so that they will be within the acceptable age at the time of test initiation. During the
acclimation period, water quality measurements of temperature, salinity, DO, and pH will be recorded
daily. Laboratory SOPs for water quality monitoring and frequency are provided in Appendix E.
Mortality of animals during holding should be no greater than 10% for all organism batches to ensure
high quality organisms are being used.
Bl.1.3 SEA Ring Preparation and Operation
Preparation- The SEA Ring hardware will be cleaned in a dilute (2%) detergent (Liquinox) overnight,
followed by conditioning in uncontaminated, filtered laboratory seawater, and a final soak in flowing
deionized water. Disposable parts (pump tubing, bottom end caps, and inner exposure chambers) will be
replaced. SEA Rings will be placed into appropriate Chemtainers, and tested to ensure the pump and
water quality sensor is functioning properly by connecting to a laptop uploaded with appropriate sensing
software.
Initiation and Operation- The SEA Ring will be placed in a Chemtainer with enough water to be
completely submerged. The water in the Chemtainer outside of the SEA Ring will be aerated
continuously at a rate of one to two bubbles per second using trickle flow aeration in both the sediment
-------
Sediment Ecotoxicity Assessment Ring
QAPP
Page 37 of 73
Version 1
May 16, 2012
and water toxicity tests. This will allow delivery of aerated water to the exposure chambers as the water
is pumped from the Chemtainer.
The required amount of sediment and/or clean seawater or Cu-spiked seawater water (Tables 1 through 5)
will then be added to each exposure chamber, followed by securing of the top chamber caps, and
initiation of the pump. The pump will be set to the desired turnover rate (approximately 10 exchanges
between the inner exposure chamber and the water in the Chemtainer per day). For sediment tests,
sediment will be allowed to settle overnight prior to organism addition. For WC tests, organisms will be
added within 3 hours of addition of samples to the test chambers. Organisms will be arbitrarily selected
and added through the organism delivery port in the chamber caps.
Replacement of the overlying water in both water and sediment tests will occur at the same frequency as
the concurrent traditional laboratory methods according to the test method summaries in Tables 1 through
5. Approximately 80% of the water will be replaced on water renewal days. Although feeding may not
take place in field exposures depending on species, organisms will be fed in laboratory trials according to
test conditions found in Tables 1 through 5 to ensure that any mortality is not as a result of lack of food.
Any required feeding will occur through the organism delivery port of each exposure chamber.
B1.2 Laboratory SEA Ring Test
The primary objective of the laboratory test is to evaluate the ability of the SEA Ring to provide
comparable data (using quantitative and qualitative criteria) to traditional EPA and ASTM-approved
laboratory methods under controlled laboratory conditions. It should be noted, however, that actual
application of the SEA Ring device in situ is not expected to necessarily produce the same results as
laboratory tests due to reasons already stated earlier in other sections of this document. For the purposes
of this comparison, SEA Rings will be contained in the laboratory in containers using test conditions and
experimental designs that are similar to those used in traditional laboratory toxicity and bioaccumulation
tests. The containers are 17 gallon high density polyethylene (HDPE) containers (Chemtainer Industries,
Inc.), frequently used to transport the SEA Rings to field sites (Figure 7).
Both sediment toxicity and WC toxicity tests will be conducted. The objective of WC toxicity tests is to
determine the potential impact of dissolved and suspended contaminants on test organisms in the WC.
The objective of benthic toxicity tests is to determine the potential impact of whole sediment exposure on
benthic organisms.
-------
Sediment Ecotoxicity Assessment Ring
QAPP
Page 3 8 of 73
Version 1
May 16, 2012
ll
Figure 7. The SEA Ring verification testing will be conducted in 17-gallon HOPE containers
(Chem-Tainer Industries; left), with concurrent standardized laboratory testing using glass beakers
such as those shown at right
Bl.2.1 Repeatability (Replicate Variability). Variability in biological response will be evaluated
among the five replicate exposure chambers in the SEA Ring to provide a measure of repeatability within
a single trial. This measure of repeatability will be assessed by quantifying biological responses at the
end of the exposure period (survival of all species tested and growth of polychaetes). A control will
consist of uncontaminated sediment from YB for comparison.
Sediment toxicity repeatability test - Two different organisms will be tested for the sediment toxicity
repeatability test: the marine amphipod Eohaustorius estuarius and the marine polychaete Neanthes
arenaceodentata. Three sediment types will be tested: 1) a sandy control sediment from Yaquina Bay,
OR, where the amphipods are collected (YB); 2) a fine-grained metals contaminated sediment (MS) that
has previously been shown to be toxic to the proposed test species; and 3) a medium-fine grained
moderately contaminated from Puget Sound Naval Shipyard in Bremerton, WA (PSNS). This third
sediment contains numerous classes of chemicals (e.g., metals, polycyclic aromatic hydrocarbons [PAHs],
PCBs), but is not expected to be toxic to the species tested for this verification study based on prior
studies. The exposure period for the sediment toxicity tests will be 10 days for the amphipod test (acute)
and 28 days for the polychaete test (chronic). Survivorship of both species will be evaluated at the end of
the exposure period. Growth of polychaetes will also be measured. Details of the test are provided in
Table 6. Five replicate chambers with 20 organisms per replicate will be tested for each species. The
reference toxicant for the solid phase sediment toxicity tests will be cadmium chloride (CdCl2) for the
amphipod and copper sulfate (CuSO4) for the polychaete. The reference toxicant tests (performed as
-------
Sediment Ecotoxicity Assessment Ring
QAPP
Page 3 9 of 73
Version 1
May 16, 2012
Table 6. Summary of Tests and Testing Frequency
Performance
Parameter
Objective
Endpoint
Comparison Based On
Testing Frequency
Minimum number
replicates
Repeatability
Comparability
Reproducibility
Determine the repeatability
among five replicates within
one SEA Ring
Determine the ability of the
SEA Ring to measure toxicity
of benthic and aquatic
organisms compared to
EPA/ASTM methods under
the same conditions
Determine the reproducibility
among three different SEA
Rings tested under the same
contaminant concentrations
and organisms
1) Organism survival, or
survival and growth2
2) Bioaccumulation of
contaminant within
organism tissue3
1) Organism survival and
growth
2) Bioaccumulation of
contaminant within
organism tissue
Organism survival
Survival, growth, and
bioaccumulation of
contaminants in organisms
among five replicates
within one SEA Ring
Survival (and growth),
and bioaccumulation of
contaminants in organisms
in the SEA Ring
compared to the bench
scale EPA and ASTM
methods
Survival of WC test
organisms in the SEA
Ring
1) Survival in WC tests with four
contaminant concentrations
(including a control) and two test
species.
2) Survival (and growth) in sediment
tests with three sediment types
including a control and up to three
test species.
3) Bioaccumulation in sediment
toxicity test of two test species,
two sediment types including a
control. Five replicates in each
case.
Survival in WC tests with four
contaminant concentrations (including
a control) and two test species.
Survival and growth in sediment tests
of three sediment types including a
control and up to three test species.
Both WC and sediment toxicity tests
will be conducted in SEA Ring and in
laboratory tests.
Five replicates of each treatment.
WC tests of one toxic Cu
concentration (400 ppb) and one
control, both with two test species.
Five replicates of each.
Total of six SEA Rings required.
Survival = 25
Growth = 5
Bioaccumulation =
15
Survival = 50
Growth = 110
Bioaccumulation =
30
Survival = 40
Survival will be determined in all species: mysid, topsmelt, amphipod, polychaete, and clam.
2Growth will be determined for one species only, the polychaete.
3Bioaccumulation of PCBs will be determined in amphipods, polychaetes, and clams.
-------
Sediment Ecotoxicity Assessment Ring
QAPP
Page 40 of 73
Version 1
May 16, 2012
standard lab exposures only) will be conducted in water only for 96 hours, with five concentrations (three
replicates each), but otherwise follow the same testing conditions summarized for the relevant test
organisms.
Water Column toxicity repeatability test - Survival of two organisms will be evaluated for the WC
toxicity test, Americamysis bahia (mysid shrimp) andAtherinops affinis (Pacific topsmelt) under a range
of Cu concentrations. This test will also include five replicate chambers for each exposure concentration
and a clean seawater control (e.g., laboratory water used to acclimate test organisms) with 10 organisms
in each replicate. The exposure period for the WC toxicity tests will be 96 hours, standard for acute
exposures for these organisms (EPA, 2002a). The details of these tests are presented in Tables 6 and 7.
Reference toxicant tests will be conducted following standard EPA methods using five dilutions of copper
sulfate in the lab concurrent to the limited Cu exposures in the SEA Ring. The three concentrations of Cu
tested in the SEA Ring will, however, allow for direct comparison to results in the standard reference
toxicant test.
Sediment bioaccumulation repeatability test - Bioaccumulation of total PCBs (as a sum of detected
congeners) will be evaluated in amphipods, polychaetes, and clams exposed to PSNS sediments in both
the SEA Ring and laboratory exposures. Exposure periods for the different species are shown in Figure 6.
Each test treatment will consist of five replicates, with amphipod and polychaete chambers containing 20
organisms, and clam chambers containing three organisms. Organisms from three of the replicates will
be purged in clean seawater overnight and analyzed for PCB concentrations. The remaining two
replicates will be purged and frozen/archived. Tissues will be analyzed by ERDC as described in Section
B4.2.
Bl.2.2 Comparability. Comparisons between results obtained from tests in the SEA Ring and
traditional EPA and ASTM laboratory methods will be evaluated under controlled laboratory conditions
as described in Section B 1.2.1. Comparability will be evaluated between responses (survival, growth, and
bioaccumulation) obtained in the standard laboratory exposures. Since both exposures will occur under
controlled laboratory conditions, results should be similar with a goal of ฑ 20% for this assessment.
Sediment toxicity comparability test - The sediment comparability test will be conducted concurrently
with the repeatability test, using the results derived from the approach described in Section B1.2.1.
-------
Sediment Ecotoxicity Assessment Ring
QAPP
Page 41 of 73
Version 1
May 16, 2012
WC toxicitv comparability test - The WC comparability test will be conducted concurrently with the
repeatability test, using the results derived from the approach described in Section B 1.2.1.
Sediment bioaccumulation comparability test - The bioaccumulation comparability test will be
conducted concurrently with the repeatability test, using the results derived from the approach described
in Section B 1.2.1.
Bl.2.3 Reproducibility. To determine if different SEA Rings are capable of producing the same
results, reproducibility among three different SEA Rings will be evaluated under the same environmental
test conditions (i.e., the same environment, contaminants and test species). The reproducibility test will
utilize the same conditions used in the repeatability and comparability tests. This evaluation will be
conducted using the WC toxicity tests only (described in Section B1.1.2) using a single concentration of
Cu (400 (ig/L). This test will be conducted concurrently with the same batch of test organisms, Cu stock
solutions, dilution water batch, and test conditions to minimize these potential confounding factors. Mean
responses will be derived for each SEA Ring with a goal of less than 20% difference in mean response
between all three, and no statistical difference among the three SEA Rings tested.
B1.3 EPA/ASTM Method Laboratory Comparability Tests
Water column toxicitv bench scale test - Pre-cleaned 500 mL plastic or 1 L glass chambers will be
prepared by washing with 2% dilute detergent (Liquinox), rinsing five times with tap water, placing in a
clean 10% HNO3 acid bath for a minimum of 4 h, followed by rinsing with acetone and five subsequent
rinses with deionized water. The final step consists of a thorough flushing with deionized water. Salinity
for marine/estuarine organisms will be kept stable within ฑ 2 parts per thousand (ppt) of the target 32 ppt;
temperature will be stable within ฑ 1ฐC throughout the exposure period. DO concentration will be kept
above a minimum threshold of 4 mg/L as feasible with the current methods described. The water quality
parameters (DO, salinity, pH and temperature) will be measured daily throughout the experiment in a
surrogate laboratory beaker.
Three concentrations of the Cu spiked seawater will be tested: 100 ppb (sublethal), 200 ppb (possibly
lethal), and 400 ppb (likely lethal) with five replicates for each concentration. Five replicates of a
negative (uncontaminated seawater) control will also be tested. The same organisms and same number of
organisms used in the SEA Ring will be used in the laboratory test. The test chambers will be capped and
-------
Sediment Ecotoxicity Assessment Ring
QAPP
Page 42 of 73
Version 1
May 16, 2012
placed in an incubator or recirculating water bath held under constant conditions for 96 hours. Survival
will be assessed at the end of the exposure.
Sediment toxicity bench-scale test - Tests will be conducted in 1 L containers that have been washed with
detergent (2% Liquinox), rinsed with acetone, five times with tap water, placed in a clean 10% nitric acid
bath for a minimum of 4 h, rinsed five times with deionized water, soaked in filtered, uncontaminated
seawater, and then thoroughly flushed with either distilled or deionized water. The final step consists of a
thorough flushing with deionized water. Salinity for marine/estuarine organisms will be kept stable
within ฑ 2 ppt of the target 32 ppt; temperature will be stable within ฑ 1ฐC throughout the exposure
period. DO concentration will be kept above a minimum threshold of 4 mg/L as feasible with the current
methods described. The water quality parameters (DO, salinity, pH and temperature) will be measured
daily throughout the experiment in a surrogate laboratory beaker. The test sediments will be thoroughly
homogenized and press-sieved (< 2.0 mm) to remove any naturally occurring benthic organisms.
Sediment will be allowed to settle overnight before introducing the organisms.
Flow rate: Per Tables 1 through 5, laboratory exposures will be conducted as static (amphipod) or static-
renewal (mysid, topsmelt, polychaete, clam) tests. The 17-gallon Chemtainers holding the SEA Rings
will follow the same renewal rate of the concurrent laboratory tests. It should be noted that although the
SEA Ring's on-board pump will be programmed to circulate the overlying water within the Chemtainer
(i.e., between the SEA Ring exposure chamber replicates and the water inside the Chemtainer outside the
replicates), there will be no actual replacement of the water from the system until the renewal is
conducted per the relevant laboratory-based protocol. It is possible that the circulation of the overlying
water between the outside and inside of the SEA Ring exposure chambers could result in a different
exposure to the samples than the standard laboratory tests, but this difference is expected to be minimal.
Other observations: During the exposure period, daily records will be kept of observable test species'
mortality, emergence of infaunal organisms, formation of tubes or burrows, and any other or unusual
behavior. Daily records of water quality (e.g., DO, salinity temperature, and pH) will be recorded in one
of the test replicates. Water quality within SEA Rings will also include continuous water quality sensing
within one replicate chamber for each treatment using a Troll 9500 (In Situ, Inc.) datasonde (Figure 8).
Ammonia concentration will be determined in the overlying water at test initiation and test end for each
test type.
-------
Sediment Ecotoxicity Assessment Ring
QAPP
Page 43 of 73
Version 1
May 16, 2012
Twist-Lock Connector
TROLL 9500
Nosecone
Figure 8. A Troll 9500 datasonde (In Situ, Inc.) will be used to continuously measure and record
water quality parameters in one of the SEA Ring exposure chambers associated with each
treatment type
B1.4 Operational Factors
The operational factors to be evaluated include the training required to operate the SEA Ring. The
technology representative will train one Battelle staff member on the use of the SEA Ring. The Battelle
staff member, as well as the technology representative, will individually use the SEA Ring during the
tests. The Battelle staff member will then document the ease of training and use of the SEA Ring. The
SEA Ring will also be compared to the EPA/ASTM approved method in terms of its practicality,
implementation and sustainability (i.e., the sampling time, waste produced, and the amount of protective
equipment required by the individual operating the technology). This will be evaluated visually by the
Battelle staff member and recorded. Examples of information to be recorded include (1) effort during
training, (2) ease of preparation of site and technology for use, (3) actual use and repair of the technology,
(4) cost associated with maintenance and repair of the technology, (5) overall convenience of the
technology, (6) safety issues when using the technology, (7) number of samples that can be tested per day,
and (8) clarity of the technology representative's instructions. Battelle will summarize these observations
to aid in describing the technology performance in the Technology Verification Report.
B1.5 Supporting Analyses
Several supporting measurements will be performed by SPAWAR during testing. Table 7 summarizes
the measurements, equipment and analytical methods or SOP.
-------
Sediment Ecotoxicity Assessment Ring
QAPP
Page 44 of 73
Version 1
May 16, 2012
Table 7. Test Methods and Equipment
Parameter
EPA Reference Test Method and
Equipment
SEA Ring Method and Equipment
Temperature
Dissolved oxygen
pH
Salinity
% solids
Total Organic Carbon (sediment)
Silt and clay content
PCB Congeners (sediment)
PCB Congeners (tissue)
Copper (seawater)
Ammonia (overlying water)
Oakton pH 11 meter
Orion 830A D.O. Meter
Oakton pH 11 Meter
Orion A+ conductivity meter
Troll 9500 Datasonde (In Situ, Inc.)
Troll 9500 Datasonde (In Situ, Inc.)
Troll 9500 Datasonde (In Situ, Inc.)
Troll 9500 Datasonde (In Situ, Inc.)
EPA 1311
Modified Corp Eng. 81 and EPA 9060 procedures
ASTM Method D422-63
Extraction: EPA Method 3545
Analysis: EPA Method 8082B
Extraction: Jones et al. (2006)
Analysis: EPA Method 8082B
EPA Method 6020
HACH Method 10031
B1.6
Statistical Analysis
Sediment toxicity data: A total of six test groups (two organisms, and three test sediment types) including
a reference sediment group (controls) will be assessed. Each group will be assessed in replicates of five.
General descriptive characteristics will be provided in the form of n, mode, mean, standard deviation,
median, minimum and maximum for continuous measures (test conditions, initial number of organisms,
concentration of contaminants, and the number and percent of organisms surviving in each of the replicate
chambers at the test) (EPA, 2002b).
Mean mortality in the control sediment of less than 10% will indicate acceptability of the test (organisms
are not affected by stressors other than the contaminants being tested) (EPA, 1994, 2002a). For
comparison purposes, the distribution of the proportion of surviving organisms and the homogeneity of
variances will be examined. If the data do not satisfy the assumptions of normality and constant variance,
they will be transformed using the arcsine/square root transformation or any other transformation that
increases normality and stabilizes the variance, such as the log transformation. The primary comparisons
of the number of organisms surviving between the replicates within a SEA Ring and between SEA Rings
will be performed using the analysis of variance (ANOVA) and the Dunnett's test (each test versus
control) or other suitable multiple comparison method. A secondary comparison of the number of
organisms surviving in all the test groups combined with that in the reference sediment (uncontaminated)
-------
Sediment Ecotoxicity Assessment Ring
QAPP
Page 45 of 73
Version 1
May 16, 2012
will be performed using the t-test. A non-parametric test such as Kruskal-Wallis test may also be
explored on the untransformed data. Test results that are significantly different than the controls will be
determined using these statistical tests.
The LC50, defined as the concentration at which 50% lethality occurs, will be calculated for the reference
toxicant tests. The statistical package CETIS (Comprehensive Environmental Toxicity Information
System) to calculate the LC50. The LCSOs will also be compared to historical data available at SPAWAR
and Nautilus to see if sensitivity of the test species/method is similar to that historically observed under
controlled laboratory conditions.
Water column toxicity data: Test groups (two organisms, three Cu concentrations) and a clean seawater
group (control) will be assessed. Each group will be assessed in replicates of five (ASTM, 2008; EPA,
2002a). General descriptive characteristics will be provided in the form of n, mode, mean, standard
deviation, median, minimum and maximum for continuous measures (test conditions, initial number of
organisms, concentration of contaminants, and the number and percent of organisms surviving in each of
the replicate chambers at the test).
A mean mortality in the control group of less than 10% will indicate acceptability of the test (organisms
are not affected by stressors other than the contaminants being tested) (EPA, 1994, 2002a). For
comparison purposes, the distribution of the proportion of surviving organisms and the homogeneity of
variances will be examined. If the data do not satisfy the assumptions of normality and constant variance,
they will be transformed using the arcsine/square root transformation or any other transformation that
increases normality and stabilizes the variance, such as the log transformation. The primary comparisons
of the number of organisms surviving between the groups will be performed using the ANOVA and the
Dunnett's test (each test versus control) or other suitable multiple comparison method. The test group
with the highest Cu concentration will be compared to the control group. A secondary comparison of the
number of organisms surviving in all the test groups combined with that in the control group will be
performed using the t-test. A non-parametric test such as Kruskal-Wallis test may also be explored on the
untransformed data. Test results that are significantly different than the controls will be determined using
these statistical tests.
The LC50 will be calculated for the standard laboratory reference toxicant tests, as well as the concurrent
Cu dilutions series conducted in the SEA Rings.
-------
Sediment Ecotoxicity Assessment Ring
QAPP
Page 46 of 73
Version 1
May 16, 2012
Bioaccumulation test data: PCB concentrations will be measured in tissues from organisms exposed to
sediment from YB/DB controls and PSNS.
Student t-tests will be used to compare the differences between the groups (a = 0.05) in order to
determine whether organisms exposed in the SEA Rings bioaccumulated PCBs differently than in the
laboratory tests. Dunnett's test may be used to compare individual test groups with the reference sediment
group.
Repeatability: Repeatability, assessed as replicate variability in this case, will be evaluated for the
sediment toxicity, WC toxicity and bioaccumulation tests.
The outcome (the number of organisms surviving in each of the replicate chambers at the end of the test
period or the bioaccumulation) will be calculated overall across all test groups and within each test group
(one of two organisms, and one of three sediment types) using descriptive statistics.
Precision will be evaluated using the standard deviation and the standard error of the sample mean ( se ),
calculated as the sample standard deviation (a) divided by the square root of the sample size (n):
se = a/^Jn
The smaller the se, the greater the precision.
The coefficient of variation ( CV ) will be calculated as the percentage of the sample standard deviation
(a) divided by the sample mean (x ):
fa\
CV = - 100
\x/
Similar measurements will be conducted for the organisms in the reference sediment (uncontaminated)
and will be considered a measure of stability of the SEA Ring device. A CV of less than 25% will be a
goal.
Differences in the outcome between the groups within the same SEA Ring will be explored using
ANOVA and the Tukey method. The number of organisms surviving (or the uptake of contaminants in
-------
Sediment Ecotoxicity Assessment Ring
QAPP
Page 47 of 73
Version 1
May 16, 2012
case of the bioaccumulation test) in each test group will be compared to that in the control group using
ANOVA and the Dunnett's test or other suitable multiple comparison method. A non-parametric test
such as Kruskal-Wallis test may also be explored on the untransformed data.
Comparability: The purpose of this analysis is to ensure that the SEA Ring will provide comparable data
to the traditional EPA/ASTM methods under controlled laboratory conditions. Thus, the concurrently
conducted traditional EPA/ASTM methods will be considered the gold standard in this analysis.
Comparability will be assessed for the same tests used to evaluate replicate variability. The general
analytical approach will be to compare the difference between all test groups with the corresponding
traditional EPA methods, followed by between group comparisons.
For the sediment and WC toxicity tests, the overall difference in the number of organisms surviving in the
SEA Ring will be compared to that observed using traditional EPA methods. Comparisons will be
performed using the t-test or a non-parametric analog as discussed above for two sample comparisons.
Between group differences (with more than two groups) will be explored using ANOVA and the
Dunnett's test.
Uptake of contaminants in tissues during the bioaccumulation exposures conducted in the SEA Ring will
be compared to that obtained following the traditional EPA/ASTM methods using the t-test or a non-
parametric analog.
Other tests may be conducted as appropriate. For example, within the sediment toxicity and WC toxicity
tests, each test group result may be standardized by the corresponding control and that standardized result
compared to the standardized result obtained using the traditional EPA methods.
Deviation of the sediment toxicity and WC toxicity test results from the traditional EPA methods may be
assessed in terms of bias. Bias will be calculated as average percent difference (%D) of each of the
sediment toxicity, WC toxicity and bioaccumulation test results from the traditional EPA methods both
overall and within each test group, as shown below:
100
-------
Sediment Ecotoxicity Assessment Ring
QAPP
Page 48 of 73
Version 1
May 16, 2012
where k is the number of valid comparisons, and x is the sample mean and X is the mean of the
traditional EPA methods.
Reproducibility: The purpose of this analysis is to determine if different SEA Ring units have a similar
performance under controlled experimental conditions. At least three different SEA Rings will be
compared under the same experimental conditions (same environment, contaminant concentration and test
organism). The test will be conducted for the WC toxicity tests only (described in Section B1.1.2), and
will be conducted concurrently with the same batch of test organisms, the highest Cu stock solution,
dilution water batch, and test conditions to minimize these as potential confounding factors.
The general analytic approach will be to compare the results among all SEA Rings deployed. The overall
difference in the number of surviving organisms will be compared among the SEA Rings using ANOVA
and between group differences will be explored using multiple comparison tests.
-------
Sediment Ecotoxicity Assessment Ring
QAPP
Page 49 of 73
Version 1
May 16, 2012
B2 SAMPLING METHOD REQUIREMENTS
B2.1 Toxicity Test Breakdown - Collection of Test Organisms
The exposure chambers in the SEA Ring are held in place with a retaining pin. Upon completion of the
exposure period, the retaining pin is removed and the chamber freed from the chamber holder. Test
organisms from both SEA Ring exposure chambers and laboratory beakers will be recovered by sieving
sediment through a 500 (im mesh sieve, which will retain the survivors.
B2.2 Collection and Analysis of Tissue Samples
At the conclusion of each sediment toxicity test, organisms will be recovered from the sediment with a
500 (im mesh size stainless steel sieve, enumerated, and transferred to clean seawater to purge ingested
sediment overnight. Whole amphipods and polychaetes, and soft body portions from clams from each
replicate will then be quickly rinsed in deionized water, weighed (for wet weight/growth assessment), and
frozen (-20 ฐC) in 2 mL plastic micro-centrifuge vials until chemical analysis.
B2.3 Collection and Analysis of Water and Sediment Samples
The concentration of Cu in WC toxicity tests will be confirmed through quantitative analysis. Water
samples of each Cu test concentration (control, 100 ppb, 200 ppb, and 400 ppb) will be collected for
analysis. Samples will be collected using trace metals techniques (Method EPA 6020) in 500 mL HDPE
or fluorocarbon bottles acidified with HNO3 to pH < 2. Samples will be stored at 0 to 4ฐC for up to 6
months, and shipped to the laboratory under COC.
The concentration of PCBs in sediment toxicity and bioaccumulation tests (YB/DB and PSNS sediments)
will be confirmed through quantitative analysis. Prior to dispensing the homogenized sediments to test
chambers, a 500 g sample will be collected into a wide-mouth glass with a Teflonฎ-lined lid and chilled to
0 to 4ฐC. Sediment will be extracted using EPA SW846, Method 3545, and analyzed using Method
8082B.
-------
Sediment Ecotoxicity Assessment Ring
QAPP
Page 50 of 73
Version 1
May 16, 2012
B3 SAMPLE HANDLING AND CUSTODY REQUIREMENTS
B3.1 Handling of Aquatic Organisms
All test organisms will be acquired from commercial vendors from either laboratory culture or field
collection, and shipped overnight to the SSC Pacific Laboratory. Upon arrival, all test organisms will
immediately commence acclimation to laboratory test water quality conditions. Organisms will be
observed for abnormal behavior and mortality prior to use in tests. A mortality rate of 5% will be used as
a threshold for organism quality prior to use in verification testing.
Organism handling will follow laboratory or above-mentioned procedures for addition to the SEA Ring
apparatus. Following the appropriate exposure duration, all organisms from the bioaccumulation tests
will be purged in uncontaminated SSC Pacific Laboratory seawater overnight, weighed, and frozen in
preparation for shipment to ERDC. A subsample of organisms will also be frozen at the beginning of the
test without any exposure to assess time zero concentrations, if needed.
B3.2 Sample Custody
Sample custody will be maintained for all water, sediment, and tissue samples. Each sample will have a
unique project identification number. This identification number will be recorded on a sample collection
form along with the other information specified on the form. After the labeled sample containers are
inspected, the sample custodian will complete the analysis request on the COC form. The COC form will
include details about the sample, such as the time, date, location, and person collecting the sample. The
COC form will track sample release from the sampling location to the testing laboratory. The COC form
will be signed by the person relinquishing samples once that person has verified that the COC form is
accurate. Samples will be sent to the appropriate laboratory via Federal Express Next or Second Day
Service (or equivalent service).
The COC procedures emphasize careful documentation of constant secure custody of samples during the
laboratory, transport, and analytical stages of project. The sample custodian (and alternate) responsible
for the proper COC during this project is:
Sample Custodian:
Gunther Rosen
SPAWAR Systems Center Pacific
-------
Sediment Ecotoxicity Assessment Ring
QAPP
Page 51 of 73
Version 1
May 16, 2012
53475 Strothe Rd., Bldg. 111, Rm 216
San Diego, CA 92152
Tel: (619) 553-0886
Cell: (619) 890-9692
E-mail: gunther.rosen@navy.mil
Alternate custodian:
Marienne Colvin
SPAWAR Systems Center Pacific
53475 Strothe Rd., Bldg. Ill
San Diego, CA 92152
Tel: (619) 553-5615
Cell: (858) 349-2926
E-mail: marine.colvin.ctr@navy.mil
B3.3 Sample Receipt
The laboratory's sample clerk will examine the shipping container and each sample cassette or sample
container to verify sample numbers and check for any evidence of damage or tampering. The COC form
will be checked for completeness and signed and dated to document receipt. Any changes will be
recorded on the original COC form and then the form will be forwarded to the VTC. The sample clerk
will log in all samples and assign a unique laboratory sample identification number to each sample and
sample set. COC procedures will be maintained in the analytical laboratory.
-------
Sediment Ecotoxicity Assessment Ring
QAPP
Page 52 of 73
Version 1
May 16, 2012
B4 ANALYTICAL METHOD REQUIREMENTS
B4.1 Water Analysis
Cu analysis will be conducted at the SSC Pacific Laboratory. Samples associated with the WC testing
will be analyzed for Cu in duplicate. Cu concentrations in the exposure water will be verified using a
Perkin Elmer ELAN DRC IIICP-MS. The lab will use EPA Method 6020 for quantification. Actual
detection limits will be determined by the laboratory and the method used to calculate them will be
reported with the test data. Duplicate samples as well as spike samples will be measured as a QA/QC
measure. The SSC Pacific Laboratory technical point of contact for Cu measurements will be Brandon
Swope (brandon.swope@navy.mil). He will provide SOPs and appropriate QA reporting for the
verification test.
The contact information for the SSC Pacific Laboratory representative is:
Brandon Swope
SPAWAR SSC Pac Chemistry Laboratory
53560 Hull Street
San Diego, CA 92152-5001
B4.2 Sediment and Tissue Analysis
PCB congeners will be analyzed in both sediment and tissues of relevant tests. Following the appropriate
exposure duration, all necessary organisms will be purged in uncontaminated (SSC Pacific Laboratory
dilution water) seawater overnight, weighed, and frozen in preparation for shipment to ERDC. ERDC
will be responsible for analyzing the samples for PCB congeners. The 18 National Oceanic and
Atmospheric Administration Status & Trend Congeners will be quantified for this test: PCBs 8, 18, 28,
52,44,66, 101, 118, 153, 105, 138, 187, 128, 180, 170, 195, 206, and 209. The handling of the sediment
and tissue samples by ERDC is outlined in its SOP. Sediment samples will be extracted using pressurized
fluid extraction (EPA Method 3545), and analyzed using gas chromatography (GC) following EPA
Method 8082B. Reporting limits for PCB congeners in sediment are expected to be <0.6 (ig/kg dry wt.
Tissue analysis will be conducted using a micro-extraction technique for use with small masses (150-500
mg wet weight; Jones et al., 2006). Tissue extracts will be analyzed for PCB congeners by GC (EPA
Method 8082B). Reporting limits for tissue are expected to be less than 2 (ig/kg on a wet weight basis.
Sediment and tissue PCB concentrations will be expressed as the sum of all detected PCB congeners, or
-------
Sediment Ecotoxicity Assessment Ring
QAPP
Page 53 of 73
Version 1
May 16, 2012
as the sum of PCB homologs. The actual detection limits and the method used to calculate them will be
reported with the test data.
Three tissue samples for each species will be analyzed for both laboratory and SEA Ring exposures,
providing QA of the measurement and sufficient data with which to make statistical comparisons between
the laboratory and SEA Ring exposure methods. Ms. Patricia Tuminello will be the point of contact at
ERDC. She will provide SOPs and appropriate QA reporting for the verification test.
The contact information for the SSC Pacific ERDC Chemistry Laboratory representative is:
Patricia Tuminello
USAGE ERDC Chemistry Laboratory
3909 Halls Ferry Road
Vicksburg, MS 39180-6199
B4.3 Tissue Lipid Analysis
Polychaete lipid concentrations will be analyzed by the ERDC toxicology laboratory with a
spectrophotometer at 490 nm following homogenization and chloroform/methanol extraction, and
calibrated using stock solutions of soybean oil according to Van Handel (1985).
The contact information for the USAGE ERDC Environmental Laboratory Risk Assessment Branch
representative is:
Dr. Jacob Stanley
3909 Halls Ferry Road
Vicksburg, MS 39180-6199
jacob.k.stanley@us.army.mil
B4.4 Instrument Calibration Requirements
The inductively coupled plasma mass spectrometry (ICP-MS) calibration requirements are presented
below. If criteria are not met, analysis will stop, corrective action taken, the instrument recalibrated, and
samples not bracketed by a passing initial calibration (ICAL) or continuing calibration verification (CCV)
reanalyzed:
For copper measurements using ICP-MS a multi-point (no less than five) calibration curve
will be generated using Perkin Elmer multi-element solution 3 (Part No. N9300233) diluted
-------
Sediment Ecotoxicity Assessment Ring
QAPP
Page 54 of 73
Version 1
May 16, 2012
with IN optima grade nitric acid. The standard curve is rejected if the R2 value is less than
0.995. The range of the calibration curve is constructed based on the best estimate of copper
concentrations being measured. If a measured value falls outside of the standard curve range,
the sample will be re-run with a different dilution factor or using a standard curve with a
greater concentration range.
ICAL: Prior to analysis a minimum of one high standard and a calibration blank; if more than
one calibration standard is used, r > 0.995.
CCV: After every 10 field samples and at the end of the analysis sequence. All analytes
within ฑ10% of true value.
The GC calibration requirements are presented below. If criteria are not met, analysis will stop,
corrective action taken, the instrument recalibrated, and samples not bracketed by a passing ICAL or
CCV reanalyzed:
ICAL: Prior to analysis a minimum of five standard standards; r > 0.995.
Second source calibration verification (ICV): Immediately following ICAL; all project
analytes within ฑ20% of expected value from
CCV: Prior to sample analysis, after every 10 samples, and at the end of the analysis
sequence. All project analytes within ฑ20% of expected value.
B4.5 Quality Control
Laboratory QC samples will be processed with each analytical batch to demonstrate analytical control. If
criteria are not met, the sample should be re-analyzed and/or re-extracted and re-analyzed. If re-analysis
is not possible due to available sample mass or holding time, then the data should be reported with a "J"
qualifier to indicate that the value is an estimated value, typically outside of the calibration range. This is
a common EPA data qualifier used in data analysis.
The ICP-MS QC requirements for Cu analysis are presented below.
Method blank: One per batch of <20 samples; no target analyte detected at > detection limit.
Laboratory control sample (LCS): One per batch of <20 samples; recovery within laboratory
control limits or 80 to 120%.
Matrix spike sample: One per batch of <20 samples; used to assess matrix interference
recovery within laboratory control limits or 25 to 145% as determined by the laboratory. If
LCS passes, re-analysis is not required.
-------
Sediment Ecotoxicity Assessment Ring
QAPP
Page 55 of 73
Version 1
May 16, 2012
The GC QC requirements for PCB analysis are presented below.
Method blank: One per batch of <20 samples; no target analyte detected at > detection limit.
LCS: One per batch of <20 samples; recovery within laboratory control limits or 25 to 145%
(based on PCB congener or Aroclor)
Matrix spike sample: One per batch of <20 samples; used to assess matrix interference;
recovery within laboratory control limits or 25 to 145% (based on PCB congener or Aroclor).
If LCS passes, re-analysis is not required.
Surrogate recovery: One or more surrogates spiked into each sample prior to sample processing
and extraction; recovery within laboratory control limits. The acceptable percent recoveries for
the surrogates are: for water samples -TMX, 25 to 140% and decachlorobiphenyl, 40 to 135%;
for sediment samples -TMX, 40 to 125%, decachlorobiphenyl, 50 to 125%; and for tissue
samples - TMX, 45 to 125% and decachlorobiphenyl, 45 to 125%. The surrogate recoveries are
defined by the laboratory based on historical experience with the extraction and analysis method
in tissue. In particular, it should be noted that the tissue sample size (150 to 500 mg) is
significantly less than the standard amount (30 g) and that will reduce extraction efficiency.
Acceptance criteria for the PE sample will be assessed as the percent recovery vs. the actual
value defined by the PE supplier. The MS recovery criteria will be applied (25 to 145%) as
acceptance criteria. This is well within acceptable control limits because due to interferences
from the matrix itself (tissue samples) it may not be possible to obtain a clean chromatogram
to accurately and specifically integrate a specific PCB peak. EPA method 8082A shows a
similar range for the fish tissue Standard Reference Material: 33 to 133% recovery.
-------
Sediment Ecotoxicity Assessment Ring
QAPP
Page 56 of 73
Version 1
May 16, 2012
B5 QUALITY CONTROL REQUIREMENTS
QC measures are included to ensure quality data are provided by the verification test. This includes
reference toxicant tests, acceptable results in control treatments, documentation that test conditions were
within required conditions, sufficient replication to demonstrate repeatability and ability to detect
significant differences among treatments.
B5.1 Reference Toxicant Test
Reference toxicant tests (also known as positive controls) are typically conducted concurrently with each
batch of test organisms to ensure organism and laboratory technical quality. Reference toxicants for the
selected test types are Cu or cadmium, depending on the species (Tables 1 through 5). Five
concentrations and a control will be prepared from verified stock solutions consisting of CuSO4 or CdCl2.
LC50 values generated from the dose response curves should be within two standard deviations of the
running mean for the testing laboratory. The proposed concentrations for the reference toxicity tests are
within the same range as that used for the WC toxicity test (100 to 400 ppb) and include an additional
concentration of 800 ppb. Where insufficient data are available, LCSOs should be comparable (within a
factor of 2) to published values for tests conducted under the same conditions. The control charts are
provided in Appendix B.
B5.2 Control Performance
Control survival is frequently used as a measure of test acceptability/QC. Where denoted in Tables 1
through 5, survival requirements will be used to assess overall QC, typically 90% survival in exposed
organisms.
B5.3 Test Conditions Acceptability
Each test has specific water quality acceptability criteria, including measures for pH, temperature,
salinity, and DO. These data will be recorded daily on the attached data sheets (Appendix A), and
compared with the acceptable ranges shown in Tables 1 through 5. Deviations from the acceptable ranges
will be considered during data interpretation. Ammonia concentration (a confounding factor in some
sediment toxicity tests) will also be measured in the overlying water prior to test initiation and test end for
each test type, using a HACH DR/2400 Spectrophotometer (Colorimetric Method, Method 10031). If
ammonia concentrations exceed published thresholds for the test species, a renewal of the overlying water
prior to organism addition will be considered and/or resulting data will be flagged prior to acceptance as
-------
Sediment Ecotoxicity Assessment Ring
QAPP
Page 57 of 73
Version 1
May 16, 2012
part of the verification study. It should be noted that ammonia is also considered a naturally occurring
toxicant.
B5.4 Comparison to Background Tissue Levels
PCB bioaccumulation in the polychaete and clam will be used as a means of assessing repeatability within
SEA Ring tests, and comparability between laboratory and SEA Ring tests. Tissue concentrations in the
PSNS sediment will be compared statistically with the YB control sediment.
-------
Sediment Ecotoxicity Assessment Ring
QAPP
Page 58 of 73
Version 1
May 16, 2012
B6 INSTRUMENT/EQUIPMENT TESTING, INSPECTION, AND MAINTENANCE
When Battelle staff operate and maintain the SEA Ring undergoing testing, those activities will be
performed as directed by the technology representative. Otherwise, operation and maintenance of the
samplers will be the responsibility of the technology representative. The manual for the SEA Ring is
provided in Appendix D.
-------
Sediment Ecotoxicity Assessment Ring
QAPP
Page 59 of 73
Version 1
May 16, 2012
B7 INSTRUMENT CALIBRATION AND FREQUENCY
The SEA Ring will be cleaned as specified above, disposable parts replaced, batteries charged, and tested
for proper function prior to test initiation. Prior to and during (daily) the test, SEA Ring pumping
operation will be verified using the on board hardware and connection to a laptop computer. Water
quality monitoring, which will be recorded continuously aboard SEA Rings, will be checked several
times during the exposures to ensure proper operation. All bench-top meters and probes (e.g., pH, DO,
salinity and temperature) used to measure water quality in the laboratory tests will be calibrated daily.
-------
Sediment Ecotoxicity Assessment Ring
QAPP
Page 60 of 73
Version 1
May 16, 2012
B8 INSPECTION/ACCEPTANCE OF SUPPLIES AND CONSUMABLES
All materials, supplies, and consumables will be ordered by the technology vendor. Reagents and
standards used by SPAWAR in preparation of analytical standards, spiking solutions, and reference
toxicant tests will be reagent grade or better and used within the expiration date assigned by the
manufacturer.
-------
Sediment Ecotoxicity Assessment Ring
QAPP
Page 61 of 73
Version 1
May 16, 2012
B9 NON-DIRECT MEASUREMENTS
Data published previously in the scientific literature will not be used to evaluate the vendor's technology
during this verification test.
-------
Sediment Ecotoxicity Assessment Ring
QAPP
Page 62 of 73
Version 1
May 16, 2012
BIO DATA MANAGEMENT
Various types of data will be acquired and recorded electronically or manually by Battelle and vendor
staff during this verification test. Table 8 summarizes the types of data to be recorded. All maintenance
activities, repairs, calibrations, and operator observations relevant to the operation of the sampling
systems being tested will be documented by Battelle or vendor staff in the project-specific LRB or
dedicated data collection forms. During testing, raw data (records of test setup, measurements,
observations, etc.) will be held by the SPAWAR point of contact. Once testing is complete, these raw
data forms and records will be submitted to the VTC. Report formats will include all necessary data to
allow traceability from the raw data to final results. A dedicated shared folder within the ETV AMS
Center SharePoint site will be established for all project records.
Records received by or generated by any Battelle or subcontractor staff during the verification test will be
reviewed by a Battelle staff member within 5 days of receipt or generation, respectively, before the
records are used to calculate, evaluate, or report verification results. If a Battelle staff member generated
the record, this review will be performed by a Battelle technical staff member involved in the verification
test, but not the staff member who originally received or generated the record. The review will be
documented by the person performing the review by adding their initials and date to the hard copy of the
record being reviewed. In addition, any calculations performed by Battelle will be spot-checked by
Battelle technical staff to ensure that calculations are performed correctly. Some of the checks that will
be performed include:
QC samples and calibration standards were analyzed according to the QAPP and the
acceptance criteria were met. Corrective action for exceedances was taken;
100% hand-entered and/or manually calculated data were checked for accuracy;
Calculations performed by software are verified at a frequency sufficient to ensure that the
formulas are correct, appropriate, and consistent;
For each cut and paste function, the first and last data value was verified versus the source
data;
Data are reported in the units specified in the QAPP;
Results of QC samples are reported; and
Any statistical calculations described in this QAPP.
-------
Sediment Ecotoxicity Assessment Ring
QAPP
Page 63 of 73
Version 1
May 16, 2012
Battelle will provide technology test data and associated reference data (including records; data sheets;
notebook records) from the first day of testing within one day of receipt to EPA and the vendor for
simultaneous review. The goal of this data delivery schedule is prompt identification and resolution of
any data collection or recording issues. These data will be labeled as preliminary and will not have had a
QA review before their release.
-------
Sediment Ecotoxicity Assessment Ring
QAPP
Page 64 of 73
Version 1
May 16, 2012
Table 8. Summary of Data Recording Process
Data to Be Recorded
Where Recorded
How Often Recorded
By Whom
Disposition of Data
Dates, times, and details of test
events
ETVLRBs, test forms
Real time data recording
throughout testing
Battelle staff
Used to organize/check test results;
manually incorporated in data
spreadsheets as necessary
SEA Ring operating conditions, ETV LRBs, or
maintenance, downtime, etc. electronically
Cu concentration in water and Obtained from
PCB concentration in sediment laboratory
Water quality parameters
When performed
After each sampling event
Read electronically from Initially and daily
instrument and recorded
in laboratory notebook
Technology
Representative and
Battelle staff
Battelle Staff
Technology
Representative and
Battelle staff
Incorporated in verification report
as necessary
Converted to spreadsheet for
statistical analysis and comparisons
Converted to spreadsheet for
statistical analysis and comparisons
Final dry weight of polychaetes
Number of surviving organisms
PCB concentration in tissue
samples
Obtained from
laboratory
Obtained from
laboratory
Obtained from
laboratory
After each sampling event
After each sampling event
After each sampling event
Technology
Representative
Technology
Representative
Technology
Representative
Converted to spreadsheet for
statistical analysis and comparisons
Converted to spreadsheet for
statistical analysis and comparisons
Converted to spreadsheets for
statistical analysis and comparisons
-------
Sediment Ecotoxicity Assessment Ring
QAPP
Page 65 of 73
Version 1
May 16, 2012
SECTION C
ASSESSMENT AND OVERSIGHT
Cl ASSESSMENT AND RESPONSE ACTIONS
Every effort will be made in this verification test to anticipate and resolve potential problems before the
quality of performance is compromised. One of the major objectives of this QAPP is to establish
mechanisms necessary to ensure this. The procedures described in this QAPP, which is peer reviewed by
a panel of outside experts, implemented by the technical staff and monitored by the VTC, will provide
information on data quality on a day-to-day basis. The responsibility for interpreting the results of these
checks and resolving any potential problems resides with the VTC. Technical staff has the responsibility
to identify problems that could affect data quality or the ability to use the data. Any problems that are
identified will be reported to the VTC, who will work with the Battelle Quality Manager to resolve any
issues. Action will be taken to control the problem, identify a solution to the problem, minimize losses,
and correct data, where possible. Independent of any EPA QA activities, Battelle will be responsible for
ensuring that the audits described below are conducted as part of this verification test.
Cl.l Performance Evaluation Audit
PE audits provide an independent assessment of the accuracy of laboratory analyses. For the ERDC
laboratory, which is analyzing PCB congeners in sediment and tissue samples, a PCB congener standard
reference material will be obtained from the National Institute of Standards and Technology and sent to
the ERDC laboratory for analysis. The PE sample will be a blind, independent standard reference
material supplied to the laboratory by Battelle. The range of potential congeners will encompass the
congeners of interest; however, the actual congeners are blind so that both false positives and false
negatives can be assessed. The acceptance criteria will be based on the actual concentrations which are
blind at this time. Battelle will evaluate whether the laboratory has passed or failed the PE. The results of
the PE sample will be reported to Battelle and EPA management. If the laboratory PE results are not
acceptable, the laboratory will be informed as to whether the results are biased high or low. Corrective
action will include an examination by the laboratory of instrument, sample handling, and sample analysis
procedures. A second PE will be supplied once the laboratory feels its analytical system is in control.
Sample analysis will not begin until PE results are acceptable. Alternatively, another laboratory will be
identified. Routine analysis will not be initiated until the laboratory demonstrates the ability to analyze
the sample with acceptable results.
-------
Sediment Ecotoxicity Assessment Ring
QAPP
Page 66 of 73
Version 1
May 16, 2012
C1.2 Technical Systems Audits
The Battelle QAO or delegate will perform a TSA during testing at SPAWAR. The purpose of the audit
is to ensure that the verification test is being performed in accordance with the AMS Center QMP and this
QAPP. The reference laboratories are not expected to be assessed during a separate TSA, provided
acceptable performance on the PE audits. The TSA may be designated to an independent person by
providing a checklist to be completed on site. During the TSA, the Battelle QAO or designee will
compare actual test procedures to those specified or referenced in this plan and review data acquisition
and handling procedures. A project-specific checklist based on the QAPP requirements will be prepared
to guide the TSA, which will include a review of the test and analytical procedures, use of the SEA Ring
technology and general testing conditions and review of test records and documentation. The Battelle
QAO will also check data acquisition procedures, and may confer with the vendor staff. The Battelle
QAO will prepare an initial TSA report and submit the report to the EPA Quality Manager (with no
corrective actions documented) and VTC within 10 business days after completion of the audit. A copy
of the final TSA report (with corrective actions documented) will be provided to the EPA AMS Center
Project Officer and Quality Manager within 20 business days after completion of the audit. At EPA's
discretion, EPA QA staff may also conduct an independent on-site TSA during the verification test. The
TSA findings will be communicated to technical staff at the time of the audit and will be documented in a
TSA report.
C1.3 Data Quality Audits
The Battelle QAO, or designee, will audit at least 10% of the sample results acquired in the verification
test and 100% of the calibration and QC data versus the QAPP requirements. Two ADQs will be
conducted for this project: The first will be conducted on the data set delivered within 30 days of test
initiation. The ADQ will be completed within 10 business days of receipt using a project-specific
checklist. The second ADQ will assess the remainder of the data, the draft report, and the verification
statement. During these audits, the Battelle QAO, or designee, will trace the data from initial acquisition
through reduction and statistical comparisons, to final reporting. All calculations performed on the data
undergoing the ADQ will be checked. Data must undergo a 100% validation and verification by technical
staff (i.e., VTC, or designee) before it will be assessed as part of the data quality audit. All QC data and
all calculations performed on the data undergoing the audit will be checked by the Battelle QAO. Results
of each ADQ will be documented using the checklist and reported to the VTC and EPA within 10
business days after completion of the audit. These reports will not include documented corrective actions.
The completed ADQs with corrective actions documented will be provided to EPA within 10 business
-------
Sediment Ecotoxicity Assessment Ring
QAPP
Page 67 of 73
Version 1
May 16, 2012
days of receipt from the VTC. A final ADQ that assesses overall data quality, including accuracy and
completeness of the technical report, will be prepared as a narrative and distributed to the VTC and EPA
within 10 business days of completion of the audit.
C1.4 QA/QC Reporting
Each assessment and audit will be documented in accordance with Section 3.3.4 of the AMS Center
QMP. The results of all audits will be submitted to EPA within 10 business days as noted above.
Assessment reports will include the following:
Identification of any adverse findings or potential problems;
Recommendations for resolving problems (If the QA audit identifies a technical issue, the
VTC or Battelle AMS Center Manager will be consulted to determine the appropriate
corrective action);
Response to adverse findings or potential problems;
Confirmation that solutions have been implemented and are effective; and
Citation of any noteworthy practices that may be of use to others.
-------
Sediment Ecotoxicity Assessment Ring
QAPP
Page 68 of 73
Version 1
May 16, 2012
C2 REPORTS TO MANAGEMENT
During the laboratory evaluation, any QAPP deviations will be reported immediately to EPA. The
Battelle Quality Manager and/or VTC, during the course of any assessment or audit, will identify to the
technical staff performing experimental activities any immediate corrective action that should be taken.
A summary of the required assessments and audits, including a listing of responsibilities and reporting
timeframes, is included in Table 9. If serious quality problems exist, the Battelle Quality Manager will
notify the AMS Center Manager, who is authorized to stop work. Once the assessment reports have been
prepared, the VTC will ensure that a response is provided for each adverse finding or potential problem
and will implement any necessary follow-up corrective action. The Battelle Quality Manager will ensure
that follow-up corrective action has been taken. The QAPP and final report are reviewed by the EPA
AMS Center Quality Manager and the EPA AMS Center Project Officer. Upon final review and
approval, both documents will then be posted on the ETV Web site (www.epa.gov/etv).
Table 9. Summary of Assessment Reports(a)
Assessment
Prepared By Report Submission Timeframe
Submitted To
TSA
ADQ
PE
Battelle 10 business days after TSA is
complete
Battelle ADQ will be completed within 10
business days after receipt of the
initial data batch and then after all
data for a phase is submitted
Battelle 10 business days after receiving
results of PE samples
EPA ETV AMS Center
EPA ETV AMS Center
EPA ETV AMS Center
(a) Any QA checklists prepared to guide audits will be provided with the audit report.
-------
Sediment Ecotoxicity Assessment Ring
QAPP
Page 69 of 73
Version 1
May 16, 2012
SECTION D
DATA VALIDATION AND USABILITY
Dl DATA REVIEW, VERIFICATION, AND VALIDATION REQUIREMENTS
The key data review and data verification requirements for this test are stated in Section BIO of this
QAPP. In general, the data review requirements specify that data generated during this test will be
reviewed by a Battelle technical staff member within 5 days of generation of the data. The reviewer will
be familiar with the technical aspects of the verification test but will not be the person who generated the
data. This process will serve both as the data review and the data verification, and will ensure that the
data have been recorded, transmitted and processed properly. Furthermore, this process will ensure that
the monitoring systems data were collected under appropriate testing.
The data validation requirements for this test involve an assessment of the quality of the data relative to
the DQI (organism age and water quality) and QC results for this test referenced in Tables 1 through 5.
Any deficiencies in these data will be flagged and excluded from any statistical comparisons to the SEA
Ring being tested, unless these deviations are accompanied by descriptions of their potential impacts on
the data quality.
-------
Sediment Ecotoxicity Assessment Ring
QAPP
Page 70 of 73
Version 1
May 16, 2012
D2 VERIFICATION AND VALIDATION METHODS
Data verification is conducted as part of the data review as described in Section BIO of this QAPP. A
visual inspection of handwritten data will be conducted to ensure that all entries were properly recorded
or transcribed, and that any erroneous entries were properly noted (i.e., single line through the entry, with
an error code, such as wn for wrong number, and the initials of the recorder and date of entry).
Instrument parameters and laboratory data collected during the test will be inspected to ensure proper
transfer from the data-logging system. All calculations used to transform the data will be reviewed to
ensure the accuracy and the appropriateness of the calculations. Calculations performed manually will be
reviewed and repeated using a handheld calculator or commercial software (e.g., Excel). Calculations
performed using standard commercial office software (e.g., Excel) will be reviewed by inspection of the
equations used for the calculations and verification of selected calculations by handheld calculator.
Calculations performed using specialized commercial software (i.e., for analytical instrumentation) will
be reviewed by inspection and, when feasible, verified by handheld calculator, or standard commercial
office software.
To ensure that the data generated from this test meet the goals of the test, a number of data validation
procedures will be performed. Sections B and C of this QAPP provided a description of the validation
safeguards employed for this verification test. Data validation efforts include the completion of QC
activities and the performance of a TSA as described in Section C. The data from this test will be
evaluated relative to the measurement DQIs described in Section A8 of this QAPP. Data failing to meet
these criteria will be flagged in the dataset and not used for evaluation of the SEA Ring, unless these
deviations are accompanied by descriptions of their potential impacts on the data quality.
An ADQ will be conducted by the Battelle Quality Manager to ensure that data review, verification, and
validation procedures were completed, and to ensure the overall quality of the data.
The PE sample will be used as verification that the laboratory analytical system is in control to correctly
identify and quantify the PCB congeners of interest.
-------
Sediment Ecotoxicity Assessment Ring
QAPP
Page 71 of 73
Version 1
May 16, 2012
D3 RECONCILIATION WITH USER REQUIREMENTS
The purpose of this verification test is to evaluate the performance of the SEA Ring in situ technology
relative to standard laboratory-based EPA/ASTM Methods for evaluating sediment and WC toxicity to
aquatic and benthic organisms. To meet the requirements of the user community, input on the tests
described in this QAPP has been provided by external experts. Additional performance data regarding
operational characteristics of the SEA Ring will be collected by verification test personnel. To meet the
requirements of the user community, these data will include thorough documentation of the performance
of the samplers during the verification test. The data review, verification, and validation procedures
described above will ensure that data meeting these requirements are accurately presented in the
verification reports generated from this test, and will ensure that data not meeting these requirements will
be appropriately flagged and discussed in the verification reports.
-------
Sediment Ecotoxicity Assessment Ring
QAPP
Page 72 of 73
Version 1
May 16, 2012
SECTION E
REFERENCES
ASTM. 2008. Standard Practice for Statistical Analysis of Toxicity Tests Conducted Under ASTM
Guidelines. El847-96.
ASTM. 2000. "Standard Guide for Conducting Sediment Toxicity Tests with Marine and Estuarine
Polychaetous Annelids," E 1611-00. In: Annual Book of ASTM Standards. Vol. 11.05. Philadelphia,
PA, pp 991-1016.
ASTM. 2010. "Standard Guide for Determination of the Bioaccumulation of Sediment-Associated
Contaminants by Benthic Invertebrates," Designation: E1688 - 10. July.
Battelle. 2011. Quality Management Plan for the ETV Advanced Monitoring Systems Center, Version 8.
U.S. Environmental Technology Verification Program, April.
EPA. 1994a. Methods for Measuring the Toxicity and Bioaccumulation of Sediment-associated
Contaminants with Estuarine and Marine Amphipods. U.S. Environmental Protection Agency. Office
of Research and Development. EPA-600-R-94-025
EPA. 1994b. Method 200.8. Revision 5.4. Determination of Trace Elements in Waters and Wastes by
Inductively Coupled Plasma-mass Spectrometry. Environmental Monitoring Systems Laboratory.
USEPA-ORD. Cincinnati, OH.
EPA. 2000. Method Guidance and Recommendations for Whole Effluent Toxicity (WET) Testing (40
CFRPart 136). United States Environmental Protection Agency. Office of Water (4303). EPA 821-B-
00-004. July.
EPA. 2002a. Methods for Measuring the Acute Toxicity of Effluents and Receiving Waters to Freshwater
and Marine Organisms" Fifth Edition. EPA 821/R-02/012, October.
-------
Sediment Ecotoxicity Assessment Ring
QAPP
Page 73 of 73
Version 1
May 16, 2012
EPA 2002b. Short-term Methods for Estimating Chronic Toxicity to Freshwater Organisms, EPA 821-R-
02-013, October.
EPA. 2008. Environmental Technology Verification Program Quality Management Plan (ETV QMP).
January (EPA/600/R-08/009).
EPA and USAGE. 1998. Evaluation of Dredged Material Proposed for Discharge in Waters of the U.S.-
Testing U.S. Army Corps of Engineers Manual. Inland Testing Manual. EPA-823-B-98-O04
Environmental Protection Agency & US Army Corps of Engineers, February 1998, Office of Water
(4305).
Jones, R.P., R.N. Millward, R.A. Karn, and A.H. Harrison. 2006. "Microscale Analytical Methods for the
Quantitative Detection of PCBs and PAHs in Small Tissue Masses," Chemosphere 62: 1795-1805.
Van Handel, E. 1985. "Rapid Determination of Total Lipids in Mosquitoes," J. Am. Mosquito Control
Assoc. 1, 302-304.
-------
Sediment Ecotoxicity Assessment Ring
QAPP
Version 1
May 16, 2012
APPENDIX A
TEST DATA SHEETS
-------
10-Day Marine Sediment Bioassay
Static Conditions
Sediment Ecotoxicity Assessment Ring
QAPP
Version 1
May 16, 2012
Water Quality Measurements
Client:
Sample ID:
Test Day
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Salinity
(ppt)
Temperature
(ฐC)
Dissolved
Oxygen (mg/L)
Test Species:
Start Date/Time:
End Date/Time:
PH
(units)
Technician
Initials
E. estuarius
Comments
QC Check:
Final Review:
-------
28-Day Marine Sediment Bioassay
Static-Renewal Conditions
Sediment Ecotoxicity Assessment Ring
QAPP
Version 1
May 16, 2012
Water Quality Measurements
Client:
Sample ID:
Test Species:
Start Date/Time:
End Date/Time:
Test Day
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
Salinity
(PPt)
Temperature
(ฐC)
Dissolved
Oxygen (mg/L)
pH
(units)
Fed
Water
Change
Technician
Initials
Comments
QC Check:
Final Review:
-------
Sediment Ecotoxicity Assessment Ring
QAPP
Version 1
May 16, 2012
Marine Acute Bioassay
Static-Renewal Conditions
Project:
Sample ID:
Test No.:
Concentration
ppb
Lab Control
50
100
200
400
800
Initial Counts
QC'd by:
Re
P
A
B
C
D
A
B
C
D
A
B
C
D
A
B
C
D
A
B
C
D
A
B
C
D
A
B
C
D
Number of Live
Organisms
0
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
24
48
72
96
Test Species:
Start Date/Time:
End Date/Time:
Salinity
(PPt)
0
24
48
1
f
i
f
i
f
i
f
i
f
i
f
i
f
Animal Source/Date Received:
72
96
Water Qi
&Tes
Counts:
Readings:
Dilutions made by:
Temperature
0
24
Age at Initiation:
48
'
f
'
f
'
f
'
f
'
f
'
f
'
f
72
96
Dissolved Oxygen
mg/L)
0
24
48
1
f
i
f
i
f
i
f
i
f
i
f
i
f
Comments: i = intial reading in fresh test solution, f = fina read ng in test chamber prior to renewal
QC Check:
Organisms fed prior to initiation, circle one ( y / n)
Tests aerated? Circle one ( y / n ) if yes, sample ID(s): Duration:
Aeration source:
72
96
AM:
PM:
Final Review:
jality Measurements
t Organism Survival
Tech Initials
0
24
48
72
96
0
24
PH
units)
48
1
f
f
f
f
f
i
f
f
72
96
Feeding Times
0
24
48
72
96
-------
Sediment Ecotoxicity Assessment Ring
QAPP
Version 1
May 16, 2012
Marine Chronic Bioassay
Project:
Sample ID:
Test No.:
Water Quality Measurements
Test Species:
Start Date/Time:
End Date/Time:
Concentration
(%)
Lab Control
Brine Control
6.25
12.5
25
50
Salinity
(PPt)
V
24"
49
Temperature
(ฐC)
1 B
54
48"
Dissolved Oxygen
(mg/L)
CF
1 ฃ4
*48"
pH
(pH units)
0"
2* '
*8
24
48
Technician Initials: WQ Readings:
Dilutions made by:
Animal Source/Date Received:
Comments:
Ohrs:
24 hrs:"
48 hrs:"
QC Check:
Final Review:
-------
Sediment Ecotoxicity Assessment Ring
QAPP
Version 1
May 16, 2012
Marine Chronic Bioassay
Project:
Sample ID:
Test No.:
Water Quality Measurements
Test Species: S. purpuratus
Start Date/Time:
End Date/Time:
Concentration
%
Salinity
(PPQ
0
ซ4
i8 '
TO '
96
Temperature
PC)
1 9
29
49
72"
96'
Dissolved Oxygen
(mg/L)
0 ป
24"
18
TO '
96" '
PH
(pH units)
0
1 21
1 48
7?
96"
24 48 72 96
Technician Initials: WQ Readings:
Dilutions made by:
Animal Source/Date Received:
Comments:
Ohrs:
24hrs:
48hrs:
72hrs:
QC Check:
Final Review:
-------
Sediment Ecotoxicity Assessment Ring
QAPP
Version 1
May 16, 2012
APPENDIX B
CONTROL CHARTS
-------
Sediment Ecotoxicity Assessment Ring
QAPP
Version 1
May 16, 2012
(SSC SD -Lab 123) CONTROL CHART FOR (Americamvsis bahia survival (96h) EC25/EC50) AND CV
600.00 n r 110
500.00 -
(3
100.00 --
- 100
M.-4-4-A '
s?
o
0.00 -I 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1- 0
1.0 2.0 3.0 4.0 5.0 6.0 7.0 8.0 9.0 10.0 11.0 12.0 13.0 14.0 15.0 16.0 17.0 18.0 19.0 20.0 21.0 22.0 23.0 24.0 25.0 26.0 27.0 28.0 29.0 30.0
TEST NUMBER
- LC50 MG/L
-A- LAB LCL
FLAT LCL
-->-- LAB UCL
Running Mean EC50
- LAB CV
EPA Max UCL
MEAN LC50
EPA CV% BENCH
EPA Max LCL
FLAT UCL
-------
Sediment Ecotoxicity Assessment Ring
QAPP
Version 1
May 16, 2012
350.00
300.00
0.00
Control Chart for Atherinops affinis
2.0 3.0 4.0 5.0
6.0
7.0 8.0 9.0
TEST NUMBER
110
<
10.0 11.0 12.0 13.0 14.0 15.0
LC50 MG/L
LAB LCL
FLAT LCL
LAB UCL
Running Mean EC50
LAB CV
EPA Max UCL
MEAN LC50
EPA CV% BENCH
EPA Max LCL
FLAT UCL
-------
Sediment Ecotoxicity Assessment Ring
QAPP
Version 1
May 16, 2012
Table B-l. 96 hr Reference Toxicity Test Data
Species & Endpoint
E. estuarius
96-hr survival
E. estuarius
96-hr survival
M. galloprovincialis
48-hr development
M. galloprovincialis
48-hr development
S. purpuratus
Fertilization
Test Period
6/10-6/14/08
6/17-6/21/08
6/6 - 6/8/08
6/12-6/14/08
6/13/2008
LC50 or
EC50
(mg/L Cd or
|jg/L Cu)
7.0
7.9
8.9
10
20.5
Historical
mean ฑ 2
SD (mg/L
Cd or |jg/L
Cu)
6.4 ฑ4.8
6.1ฑ4.3
6.5 ฑ4.1
6.7 ฑ4.3
18.8 ฑ15.5
95% Lower
Confidence
Limit
6.2
6.6
4.1
4.3
19.5
95% Upper
Confidence
Limit
7.8
9.5
10.6
10.9
21.6
CV (%)
37
35.2
31.5
32
41.2
-------
Sediment Ecotoxicity Assessment Ring
QAPP
Version 1
May 16, 2012
APPENDIX C
CHAIN OF CUSTODY FORMS
-------
ENVIRONMENTAL SCIENCES AND
APPLIED SYSTEMS BRANCH, CODE 71750
53605 HULL STREET
SAN DIEGO, CA 92152-5000
Chain of Custody Record
Systems Center
San Diego
Date:
Page of
Project Title/Project Number:
Remarks/Air Bill:
Samplers): (Signature)
Tel:
Fax:
Email:
Special Instructions:
Field Sample
Identification
Date
Relinquished by: (Signature)
Relinquished by: (Signature)
Time
Matrix
Type
Temp (ฐC)
Project Leader:
Contact:
Contact Tel:
Requested Analyses
Received by: (Signature)
Received by: (Signature)
Date:
Date:
Time:
Time:
-------
Sediment Ecotoxicity Assessment Ring
QAPP
Version 1
May 16, 2012
APPENDIX D
SEA RING MANUAL
-------
ZEBRA-TECH LTD
www.zebra-tech.co.nz
SEA Rings
Operation Manual
Version 1.0
-------
SEA Rings Operation Manual
Contents
1. Overview 1
Pump 1
Control module 2
Chamber cap 3
2. Software Installation 4
3. Charging 4
4. On-Off Switch 4
5. Status Indicator LED's 5
6. Operation 6
Chamber cap removal 6
Software 6
7. Datafile 9
8. Serial Debug 9
Fitting Exposure Chambers 9
9. Servicing 10
Changing the pump tubing 10
O-rings 10
10. Firmware Upgrade 11
11. Connector Pin Outs 11
ZEBRA-TECH LTD
www.zebra-tech.co.nz
-------
SEA Rings Operation Manual
1. Overview
Pump
The pump consists of a pump motor housing and a pump housing.
The pump motor housing contains the pump motor, control electronics, and battery pack.
Warning:
The pump has a very powerful motor that can cause personal harm. Keep fingers away
from the pump rotor and always switch off before removing the pump cover plates.
Pump rotor
support bar
Pump roller
Pump motor
housing
Pump
Pump rotor
Inlet manifold
Control module
ZEBRA-TECH LTD
www.zebra-tech.co.nz
-------
SEA Rings Operation Manual
Control module
The control module features 2 status indicator LED's, an on/off switch, and the charging/communication
connector.
Battery
status LED
Mode status
LED
Connector cap
On/off switch
ZEBRA-TECH LTD
2|
tvww.zebra-tech.co. nz
-------
SEA Rings Operation Manual
Chamber cap
Inlet connector
Duck bill valve
Syringe port
stopper
Cap
retaining pin
Inlet filter
Outlet filter
3 |
ZEBRA-TECH LTD
www.zebra-tech.co.nz
-------
SEA Rings Operation Manual
2. Software Installation
The SEA Rings are supplied with a USB flash drive. This contains the SEA Rings communication software
installation package. Double clicking this should launch the installer. When upgrading to a more recent
version, the previous version does not need to be removed prior to installation.
The latest software is available for the Zebra-Tech web site;
http://www.zebra-tech.co.nz/downloads
3. Charging
The SEA Rings have an on-board Metal Hydride battery pack. The pack can be re-charged using the
supplied charger. Allow 24 hours for a full charge.
The charger model number is the Universal charger, part number BPNC112900. This can be powered
from an AC adaptor. The AC adaptor can be obtained from Radio Shack, part number 273-318, with an
adaptor plug, part number 273-344. (Note: Align "tip" on the adaptor plug with "+" on the charger).
After disconnecting the charger, do not replace the corns connector cap on the SEA Rings for 1 hour.
This enables any gas discharged by the battery pack to vent through the corns connector.
Metal Hydride batteries self-discharge at a rate of around 1% per day. Always charge the SEA Rings as
close to the deployment date as possible.
4. On-Off Switch
The SEA Rings control module has an On-Off switch. In the off position, the SEA Rings pump will not
operate, although the SEA Rings will still communicate with a PC whilst in the "off" position.
When the switch is turned on, if the start time/date has not been reached, the SEA Rings will sleep until
the start time/date rolls over. The first flush then occurs after the flush interval has expired.
If the start time/date has expired when the switch is turned on, the first flush occurs after the flush
interval has expired.
ZEBRA-TECH LTD
www.zebra-lech.co.nz
-------
SEA Rings Operation Manual
5. Status Indicator LED's
The SEA Rings control module has 2 status indicator LED's, that blink every 15 seconds.
Battery status indicator:
LED Blink Sequence:
One flash
Two flashes
Three flashes
Operation mode indicator:
I LED Blink Sequence:
One flash
Two flashes
Three flashes
Status Description:
Ok
Low battery warning (< 7.3 volts)
Low battery shutdown (6.5 volts)
Status Description:
Off
Delayed start countdown
Operational
15 |
ZEBRA-TECH LTD
www.zebra-tech.co.nz
-------
SEA Rings Operation Manual
6. Operation
Chamber cap removal
The chamber caps are secured in the Chamber Holder with a retaining pin. The retaining pin is secured
by a keyhole style locking mechanism. To remove the retaining pin, rotate it so that the black dot is
uppermost. The pin can then be pulled out of the chamber holder.
Keyhole lock
Chamber cap
retaining pin
Chamber holder
Orientation dot
Software
Ensure the SEA Rings are charged. Connect the corns cable to the SEA Rings and a USB port on the PC.
Start the SEA Rings communication application. Provided the SEA Rings are correctly connected and
operational, the min window should open (Figure 1).
ZEBRA-TECH LTD
6|
tvww.zebra-tech.co. nz
-------
SEA Rings Operation Manual
17
1 13 12
15 20
1 13 12
Start time (HH:MM)
Start date (MM:DD:YY)
Stop time (HH:MM)
Stop date (MM:DD:YY)
Chamber flush
duration (Minutes)
Chamber flush interval
(Minutes)
SEA Rings time/date 15:14:36 01/16/2012
PC time/date 15:14:37 01/16/2012
About
Test pump
Offload
1
Upload settings
Delete data
Set time
Close
Voltage: 1 AAV- Memory capacity status:1 %
Figure 1: SEA Rings application main program window
Test Pump
Pressing this button switches on the pump. The pump remains on until the button is pressed again, or
the SEA Rings application is closed.
Offload
The Offload button downloads data from the SEA Rings to a user selected file on the PC. The file format
is ASCII, comma separated, and can be opened in Excel.
The data in the SEA Rings is stored in non-volatile memory. If the battery goes flat, data is not lost.
Upload Settings
Once the operating parameters have been set, they are sent to the SEA Rings by pressing the "Upload
settings" button.
17 |
ZEBRA-TECH LTD
www.zebra-tech.co.nz
-------
SEA Rings Operation Manual
Delete Data
Data can be deleted off the SEA Rings using the "Delete data button".
Set Time
The current time and date of the SEA Rings can be synchronised with the PC time and date. The SEA
Rings time will be reset if the battery goes completely flat.
Chamber Flush Duration
This field is the number of minutes that the pump will be operating for each flush cycle.
Chamber flush interval
This field is the number of minutes that the pump is not operating between flush cycles.
Voltage
This field indicates the battery voltage. Around 9 volts is fully charged, 7.5 volts is mid-charge, and 6.5
volts is flat. If the battery voltage drops lower than 6.5 volts, the SEA Rings will cease functioning, and
enter a low power shutdown mode. The pump will not operate until the batteries have been recharged.
Memory status
This is the percentage of the memory used.
ZEBRA-TECH LTD
www.zebra-lech.co.nz
-------
SEA Rings Operation Manual
7. Datafile
SEA Rings serial number: 1231
PC download time 13/01/2012 15:30
Start 15:17 13/1/2012 8.4 5
Stop 15:18 13/1/2012 8.4 4
Start 15:19 13/1/2012 8.4 5
Stop 15:20 13/1/2012 8.4 5
The fields are:
Start/stop, time (HH:MM), date (MM: DD: YY), battery voltage, number of pump revolutions.
8. Serial Debug
The SEA Rings can be optionally supplied with a wet pluggable connector on the side of the pump
housing. This can be used to monitor the pump operation in a laboratory test situation.
To display the serial debug, connect the cable onto a PC and start a terminal emulator, such as "Term",
which is included on the Zebra-Tech USB flash drive. Set the serial port to the appropriate number and
set the baud rate to 19200. The parity is None, data bits 8, stop bits 1.
Whenever the pump starts or stops, the time and date will be displayed, together with the number of
pump revolutions.
When the serial debug cable is disconnected, the dummy connector MUST be fitted to protect the
connector.
Never connect both the serial debug cable and the main corns cable onto SEA Rings at the same time.
Fitting Exposure Chambers
The exposure chambers can be made out of Butyrate tube. The size is 2.75 OD x 2.625 ID.
The tube can be sourced from K-Mac Plastics, 3821 Clay Ave SW, Wyoming, Michigan 49548,
Tel: 616-406-0671.
The part number is KM-2340 - CAB- Hollow Tubes- Clear- Tenite- 2.75 OD x 2.625 ID.
A cross hole for the chamber cap pin needs to be drilled through the tube:
1. Install the exposure chamber onto the Chamber Jig, available from Zebra-Tech. Alternatively fit
the chamber onto a chamber cap.
2. Using a 9mm drill, drill the cross hole through the walls of the tube, using the cap or jig as the
guide.
3. De-burr the 2 holes, particularly the internal side of the holes.
19 |
ZEBRA-TECH LTD
www.zebra-tech.co.nz
-------
SEA Rings Operation Manual
9. Servicing
Changing the pump tubing
The SEA Rings use around 3m of silicone tube, 8mm ID x 10mm OD. When replacing the tube, replace all
the tubes using tube from a single roll. This ensures the tube wall thickness will be consistent. If tubes
with inconsistent wall thickness are used, the pump performance maybe compromised.
To change the peristaltic pump tubing:
1. Switch off the SEA Rings.
2. Disconnect the pump tubing from the tube connectors on the chamber caps, and the inlet
manifold.
3. Remove the 4 nuts around the top of the pump, and lift off the pump cover plate.
4. Lift the pump housing off the pump motor housing.
5. Unscrew the 2 slotted nylon countersunk screws and remove the pump rotor support bar.
6. Gently ease the pump rotor up, out of the pump housing.
7. Remove the old pump tubing from the pump housing.
8. Replace the pump rotor and the rotor support bar.
9. Systematically thread the new pump tube pieces into the pump housing, rotating the pump rotor
to aid insertion.
10. Connect the tubes onto the corresponding port on the inlet manifold. Manually rotate the pump
rotor to ensure the tubing is correctly positioned.
11. Hook the outlet end of the pump tubes onto the connector on the corresponding chamber caps.
12. Replace the pump onto the pump motor housing ensuring the drive train engages correctly.
13. Switch on the SEA Rings, and using the setup application, test run the pump, checking the tubes
remain correctly positioned. Stop the pump.
14. Replace the pump cover plate.
O Rings
Chamber Cap: 2 3/8" x 3/32" Nitrile (Optionally silicone)
Syringe port: 15/16" x 3/32" Nitrile (Optionally silicone)
ZEBRA-TECH LTD
I 101
www.zebra-lech.co.nz
-------
SEA Rings Operation Manual
10. Firmware Upgrade
The firmware inside the SEA Rings can be updated using the boot-loader application provided on the
Zebra-Tech USB flash drive. Consult Zebra-Tech prior to performing a boot-load.
1. Ensure SEA Rings application is closed. Connect the SEA Rings to the corns cable and plug the
cable into the PC.
2. Start the boot-loader application.
chip45boot2 GUI
Version 1.11
Main Automator | Command Shell
chip45
Select COM Port
RS455 iBaudratei ] Show Non-Standard Baudrates
COM24
COM23
C.Q.M7
COM22
Rash Hexfile
c:\Pnojects\Sea Rings DevXExeXSea Ring .hex
Eeprom Hexfile
Select Rash Hexfile
Select Eeprom Hexfile
Send This Pre-String Before Connect and wait *
90
msec.
BOOTLOADER/
Connect to Bootloader
Start Application
Program Rash
Program Eeprom
Show Communication Log
(C)chip45GmbH&Co. KG
http://www .chip45.com
Ascii < Hex
Read Eeprom
Status
better embedded.
I HI
ZEBRA-TECH LTD
www.zebra-tech.co.nz
-------
SEA Rings Operation Manual
11. Connector Pin Outs
Charging/Communication Cable:
I Pin number:
i
Function:
Charge
Ground
PC Transmit
PC Receive
Optional Serial Debug Connector:
Pin number:
1
2
Function:
Ground
PC Receive
ZEBRA-TECH LTD
I 12
www.zebra-lech.co.nz
-------
Sediment Ecotoxicity Assessment Ring
QAPP
Version 1
May 16, 2012
APPENDIX E
STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES
-------
SPfWAR
Systems Center
PACIFIC
Standard Operating Procedures
November 10, 2011
For
SSC Pacific Bioassay Laboratory
Bldg. Ill Rm. 116
53475 Strothe Road
Bldg. Ill Room 116
San Diego, CA 92152-5000
619-553-0886 619-553-2766
-------
Table of Contents
Section Page
1.0 PROCEDURES FOR CONDUCTING TOXICITY TESTS 4
1.1 Bivalve embryo-larval development test 4
1.2 Acute toxicity test with bioluminescent dinoflagellates (QwikLite) 8
1.3 Reference toxicant test with marine amphipods 11
1.4 Sediment toxicity test with marine amphipods 14
1.5 Embryo-larval development test with sand dollars 18
1.6 Embryo-larval development test with purple sea urchins 22
1.7 Acute toxicity test with juvenile mysid shrimp 26
1.8 Acute toxicity test with topsmelt larvae 30
2.0 TEST CONDITIONS AND ACCEPTABILITY CRITERIA 34
2.1 Bivalve embryo-larval development test (chronic) 34
2.2 Sediment-water interface (SWI) toxicity test with bivalve embryos 35
2.3 Marine Amphipod Reference Toxicity Test 36
2.4 Sediment toxicity test with marine amphipods (acute) 37
2.5 Bioluminescence Inhibition Test (Qwiklite) with Dinoflagellates 38
2.6 Echinoderm embryo-larval development test (chronic) 39
2.7 Mysid shrimp Survival Test (Acute) 40
2.8 Topsmelt Larval Survival Test (Acute) 41
3.0 PROCEDURES FOR EQUIPMENT 42
3.1 Protocol for autoclave 42
3.2 Calibration and use of the Orion 720A ISE meter/ ammonia probe 43
3.3 Calibration and use of the Accumet pH meter 46
3.4 Calibration and use of the Orion (model 840) dissolved oxygen probe 48
3.5 Measuring ammonia with the HACK DR/2000 spectrophotometer Error! Bookmark not
defined.
3.6 Measureing ammonia with the HACK DR/2400 spectrophotometer 50
3.7Barnstead e pure water purification system 52
3.8 Calibration and use of the Orion aplus (105a+) basic conductivity meter 53
3.9 Calibration and use of the Orion (model 830A) Portable dissolved oxygen probe 55
3.10 Percival Scientific 136LL Incubator 57
3.11 Calibration and use of the Oakton pH 11 meter 59
4.0 STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES- MISCELLANEOUS 60
4.1 Glassware and plasticware cleaning 60
4.2 Receiving and holding test organisms 63
4.3 Maintaining dinoflagellate cultures 65
4.4 Preparation of enriched seawater medium (ESM)1 67
4.5 Hatching brine shrimp and their use as test organism food 69
4.6 Hypersaline brine and artificial sea salt use 70
4.7 Reference toxicant test dilutions 72
4.8 Acquisition, Reduction, and Reporting of Data 75
4.9 Recording and handling data 76
4.10 Statistical analysis of data 78
4.11 Hazardous material storage, disposal and safety information 80
-------
4.12 Counting sperm with a hemocytometer 85
4.13 Counting mussel/oyster larvae using an inverted microscope 88
5.0 LOGS AND DATA SHEETS 90
5.1 Echinoderm embryo-larval development test - water quality data 90
5.2 Bivalve embryo-larval development test - water quality data 91
5.3 Embryo-larval development test calculations 92
5.4 Embryo-larvae development test results RAW data sheeT 93
5.5 Dinoflagellate PMT count sheet for copper reference toxicant test 94
5.6 Dinoflagellate PMT count sheet 95
5.7Neanthes 28 day water chemistry data sheet 98
5.8 Neanthes survival data sheet 99
5.9 Amphipod 10 day water chemistry datasheet 101
5.10 Amphipod survival data sheet 102
5.11 Acute fish/mysid survival sheet 103
5.12 Dinoflagellate maintenance log 104
5.13 Brine Dilution Worksheet 105
6.0 REFERENCES 107
-------
1.0 PROCEDURES FOR CONDUCTING TOXICITY TESTS
1.1 BIVALVE EMBRYO-LARVAL DEVELOPMENT TEST
TESTING FACILITY: SPAWAR SYSTEMS CENTER
BIOASSAY LABORATORY (RM 116)
CODE 71750
53475 STROTHE RD.
BLDG. 111
SAN DIEGO, CA 92152
I. OBJECTIVE: This method estimates the chronic toxicity of effluent and receiving waters to the
embryos and larvae of bivalve molluscs. The test endpoint is normal shell development and should
also include mortality1.
II NECESSARY MATERIALS AND SUPPLIES
Brillo pads - to clean exterior of mussels
Beakers- 400-600ml - with dilution water held at 15ฐC for mussels once spawning is induced,
and 1 L beaker for egg solution.
Plastic holding tanks - 3 to 6L
Ippt copper stock solution- for reference toxicant test
Graduated cylinders - Class A, borosilicate glass or non-toxic plastic labware, 5 0-1000ml for
making test solutions.
pH meter - for measuring test solutions
Dissolved oxygen meter - for measuring test solutions
Refractometer - for determining salinity of test solutions
Thermometer - digital or laboratory grade
Test chambers - 20ml glass scintillation vials and caps - pre-conditioned in dilution water.
Colored labeling tape
Dilution water - natural seawater or hypersaline brine made from natural seawater and diluted
with deionized water
Light microscope and slides
Pipets, automatic - adjustable, to cover a range of 0.01 to 5 ml and pipette tips
Calculator
Volumetric flasks- Class A, borosilicate glass or non-toxic plastic labware, 250ml for making
test solutions
Wash bottles - for reagent water, dilution water, for topping off graduated cylinders, for
rinsing small glassware and instrument electrodes and probes
Inverted microscope - for inspecting gametes and counting embryos and larvae.
Counter, two unit, 0-999 - for recording counts of embryos and larvae
80 jam screen
54 jam screen
37 jam screen
22 jam screen
Hemocytometer- for counting sperm
Data sheets
-------
PROTOCOL FOR 48 HOUR BIVALVE EMBRYO-LARVAL DEVELOPMENT TEST WITH THE BLUE
MUSSELS OR PACIFIC OYSTER (Mytilus galloprovincialis or Crassostrea gigas) Cont'd
III METHODS
A. OBTAINING AND HOLDING ORGANISMS
1. Purchase mussels or oysters from Carlsbad Aquafarm and hold in tanks (cold room) with raw
flowing seawater (ideal conditioning temperature is 12 - 14 ฐC) until they are needed for
testing. Holding and conditioning tanks should be drained and sprayed with fresh water at least
once weekly to prevent accumulation of organic matter and bacteria. Dead animals should be
removed daily.
2. Clean the exterior of approximately 50 mussels or oysters with a brillo pad and filtered
seawater. Hang remaining mussels or oysters off research pier or place in cold room tanks,
depending on space availability and testing requirements.
B. SPAWNING AND FERTILIZATION
1. Place approximately 10-15 mussels/oysters in a single layer at the bottom of the spawning
chambers (3 or 6 L plastic holding tanks). Plug sink and fill with hot water. Place 2 L
Erlenmeyer flasks filled with dilution water into the hot water. Remove flask when temperature
reaches 25-30 ฐC, or approximately 10 ฐC above the holding temperature. Pour enough of the
25-30 ฐC water on mussels/oysters so that they are covered completely. When individuals
begin to spawn, remove from the holding tank and place each in a separate beaker at testing 15-
20 ฐC) temperature in filtered seawater. During spawning, a sub-sample of gametes from each
beaker should be observed for quality under the microscope and then labeled "eggs" or
"sperm".
2. If no animals spawn within 30 minutes, the water should be returned to conditioning
temperature (15 ฐC for mussels, 20 ฐC for oysters) for 15 minutes and the stimulation process
repeated. In addition to heat treatment, mussels can be injected in the posterior adductor
muscle with 1.0 ml of 0.5 M KC1. When individuals begin to release gametes, immediately
isolate in a 200-300 ml glass beaker with filtered dilution water held at 15 ฐC in the incubator.
3. Eggs should be passed through an 80-|om screen. The eggs will pass through the screen and
debris retained. Pool quality eggs from different females together in a 1 L beaker, and fill with
dilution water to approximately the 600 ml mark. Poor quality eggs will be vacuolated, small,
or abnormal in shape. The concentration of the egg stock can be determined by counting a 1 ml
sample at 400X. The pooled egg density should be adjusted to 5,000 to 8,000 eggs/ml before
adding sperm.
4. Sperm should be passed through a 37-|o,m screen to remove feces and other material. Sperm
will pass through the screen while debris will be retained. Sperm counts can be made with a
hemacytometer. Sperm should be added so there are 105 to 107 sperm/ml in the final mixture.
5. Add sperm to beaker with eggs. Hold at 15 ฐC, gently mixing solution with a stirring
rod every few minutes.
-------
PROTOCOL FOR 48 HOUR BIVALVE EMBRYO-LARVAL DEVELOPMENT TEST WITH THE BLUE
MUSSELS OR PACIFIC OYSTER (Mytilus galloprovincialis or Crassostrea gigas) Cont'd
6. After fertilization (10 to 15 minutes), pass the embryo suspension through a 54-|om screen to
remove debris. Excess sperm, bacteria, and protozoans should be removed by pouring
embryos onto a 22-|am screen, washing delicately with dilution water, then backwashing into a
suitable container with dilution water. Adjust embryo density to about 1500 to 3000
embryos/ml. Maintain the resulting mussel embryo suspension at 15 ฐC, and oyster embryo
solution at 20 ฐC. Keep embryos suspended by stirring frequently, and begin test within 4
hours.
C. CONDUCTING THE TEST
1. About 1 hour after fertilization, a 1 ml sample should be placed in a Sedgwick-Rafter cell and
the number of embryos developing to a 2-cell stage or beyond counted.
2. In addition to test materials or effluents, a reference toxicant test with copper should be
conducted. Copper concentrations should include 0, 2.9, 4.1, 5.9, 8.4, 17.2, 25 ppb Cu for
mussels. Concentrations should include 0, 4.1, 5.9, 8.4, 17.2, 25, 35 ppb Cu for oysters. Allow
these solutions to equilibrate for at least one hour before testing. *Please refer to the "Bivalve
embryo development data sheet"' for calculations.
3. Within 4 h of fertilization, distribute embryos to test containers already containing 10 ml of test
solution in a random order using an automatic pipette. Be sure to keep embryo suspension well
mixed. This is achieved by use of a perforated plunger or gently alternating between swirling
and back and forth motions of the flask. The concentration of embryos in the test solutions
should be about 20 embryos/ml. This typically requires an addition of 100 (il of a 2000
embryo/ml suspension.
4. Cap or cover (with acrylic plates) scintillation vials to prevent evaporation. Keep vials in an
incubator at 15 ฐC (mussels) or 20 ฐC (oysters) on a 12 hr light/12 hr dark cycle.
5. Initial embryo density is measured in five additional scintillation vials, which are immediately
preserved by adding 1 ml of concentrated formaldehyde to each vial.
6. Water quality parameters (pH, temperature, salinity, dissolved oxygen) are measured
for an additional replicate with test organisms, but not used to assess larval development, at test
initiation and termination.
7. After 48 h (or up to 54 h if development in clean water controls is not complete),
preserve test organisms by adding 1 ml concentrated formaldehyde and capping vials.
IV DATA COLLECTION
A. Within 7 days, count larvae using an inverted microscope, noting normally developed (those that
have achieved the D-hinge stage) vs. abnormally developed.
B. Refer to "Protocol for counting mussel larvae"2 for tips on counting.
-------
PROTOCOL FOR 48 HOUR BIVALVE EMBRYO-LARVAL DEVELOPMENT TEST WITH THE BLUE
MUSSELS OR PACIFIC OYSTER (Mytilus galloprovincialis or Crassostrea gigas) Cont'd
V. ANALYZING DATA
A. Using CETIS or Toxcalc, enter data retrieved from enumeration of larvae to determine the EC50,
LOEC, NOEC, or other appropriate toxicity metric. Please refer to "Protocol for Statistical
Analysis of Toxicity Data3".
B. In accordance with USEPA (2002), all Toxcalc-generated concentration-response curves will be
evaluated for acceptability.
'Modified from "US EPA's Short-Term Methods for Estimating the Chronic Toxicity of Effluents and Receiving Waters to Marine and Estuarine
Organisms. First edition. EPA/600/R-95/136. August 1995.
2 "Bivalve embryo development data sheet" and "Protocol for counting mussel larvae" can be found in the sub-directory :
C:\WINDOWS\Desktop\Laboratory 116\Protocols and logs
-------
3 "Protocol for Protocol for Statistical Analysis of Toxicity Data" can be found in the sub-directory : C:\WINDOWS\Desktop\Laboratory
116\Protocols and logs
1.2 ACUTE TOXICITY TEST WITH BIOLUMINESCENT DINOFLAGELLATES
(QWIKLITE)
TESTING FACILITY: SPAWAR SYSTEMS CENTER
BIOASSAY LABORATORY (RM 116)
CODE 71750
53475 STROTHE RD.
BLDG. 111
SAN DIEGO, CA 92152
I. OBJECTIVE: This method is used to estimate toxicity of effluent and receiving waters to
dinoflagellates. When specific species of bioluminescent Dinoflagellates are exposed to toxicants, a
measurable reduction in bioluminescence is observed following mechanical stimulation when
compared to controls1.
II NECESSARY MATERIALS AND SUPPLIES
500 ml flasks to maintain dinoflagellate cultures.
Temperature controlled light chamber (e.g. Percival Scientific Model I-35LLVL) capable of
maintaining test conditions at 19 ฐC with a 12h light: 12h dark photoperiod
Test chambers - 4.5 ml clear plastic cuvettes - pre-soaked in dilution water.
Cuvette rack
Colored labeling tape
Dilution water - natural seawater (i.e. Scripps) or hypersaline brine made from natural
seawater
Light microscope and slides
Pipets, automatic - adjustable, to cover a range of 0.01 to 5 ml and pipette tips
Calculator
Volumetric flasks- Class A, borosilicate glass or non-toxic plastic labware, 250ml for making
test solutions
Ippt copper stock solution
Graduated cylinders - Class A, borosilicate glass or non-toxic plastic labware, 5 0-1000ml for
making test solutions.
pH meter - for measuring test solutions
Dissolved oxygen meter - for measuring test solutions
Refractometer - for determining salinity of test solutions
Thermometer - digital or laboratory grade
Wash bottles - for reagent water, dilution water, for topping off graduated cylinders, for
rinsing small glassware and instrument electrodes and probes
Qwiklite testing equipment - either SeaLite or NRaD testing units
Data sheets
Black felt or box to cover dinoflagellates while testing
Red light for minimal illumination for experimenter during testing
-------
PROTOCOL FOR CONDUCTING A 24 HOUR TOXICITY TEST WITH BIOLUMINESCENT
DINOFLAGELLATES (Ceratocorys horrida) Cont'd
III METHODS
A. DETERMINING CULTURE DENSITIES
1. Select a culture that is 1 to 2 weeks old.
2. To identify a healthy culture, look for a flask with a high density of cells (high density ensures
less culture needed, which lowers the chance of EDTA and trace metals from interfering with the
test), low levels of debris, and one that illuminates brightly when agitated (in a dark room).
3. After ensuring the culture is well homogenized, pipette a 20 \i\ aliquot onto a slide and count
cells. Cultures are homogenized by gentle mixing, alternating between swirling and side to side,
and back and forth movement of the flask. If cells are moving too fast on the slide, add a drop of
formalin. Repeat 2 more times with additional 20 \i\ aliquots.
4. To determine the density in cells/ml, take the mean count of the three 20 jol aliquots and use the
following formula:
(X cells/20 nl) x (1000 nl/ml) = cells/ml, where X= mean of 3 aliquots
IV CONDUCTING THE TESTS
A. Calculate the volume of culture to add to each flask (reference toxicant or effluent dilution) using
the following formula:
CiVi=C2V2
For example, if your culture has 2000 cells/ml, your desired cell concentration is 100 cells/ml and
the total desired volume of each flask is 50ml;
(2000cells/ml) (X) = (100cells/ml)(50 ml)
X= 2.5 ml of culture be added to 47.5 ml of solution.
B. Prepare reference toxicant dilutions using the table described in "protocol for reference toxicant
dilutions1". Prepare effluent dilutions as well. Allow solutions to calibrate for a least one half-hour.
C. Add calculated volume of cell culture to test solutions, remembering to agitate culture
adequately so cells are evenly distributed. Pipet from the same place in the flask each
time.
D. Pipette five replicates of 3 ml test solution for each concentration into cuvettes, swirling test
solution every three replicates.
E. Store cuvettes in 19 ฐC incubator for 24 hrs.
-------
PROTOCOL FOR CONDUCTING A 24 HOUR TOXICITY TEST WITH BIOLUMINESCENT
DINOFLAGELLATES (Ceratocorys horrida) Cont'd
V DATA COLLECTION
A. Turn the lights off in the laboratory, gently remove test cuvettes from incubator- approximately 4
hours after initiation of the dark phase (typically between 11 am - 2 pm, depending on how lights
are set in incubator).
B. Be very gentle. Do not shake, bump or swing cuvettes around (this will cause them to illuminate
and lose potential light productivity).
C. Carefully take each cuvette and place into SeaLite or SPAWAR testing unit, press appropriate start
button and record data onto pre-printed data sheet. Be sure to keep cuvettes covered with black felt
as they await reading of light output. If using the SeaLite unit, the "QwikLite" software it uses can
record data automatically, but will not take into account randomization of cuvette readings, which
is recommended.
D. After measuring bioluminescence in each cuvette, empty solution into beaker and discard
cuvette.
VI ANALYZING DATA
A. QwikLite software will compute statistics (e.g. EC50 values where appropriate).
B. If SPAWAR unit is being used, PMT counts can be entered into an MS Excel spreadsheet called
"NRaD analysis^ .
C. After opening the Excel file, enter PMT counts into appropriate cells. Calculations will be made
automatically.
D. If an EC50 value is desired, it can be determined with CETIS or ToxCalc software. Alternatively,
the "Toolkit" program found on the LAB 116 computer desktop can be used to determine an EC50
by linear interpolation.
1 Modified from ASTM Standard Guide for Conducting Toxicity Tests With Bioluminescent Dinoflagellates. Designation E 1924 - 97
2 Protocol for reference toxicant dilutions can be found in the sub-directory : C:\WINDOWS\Desktop\Laboratory 116\Protocols and logs
3 Nard analysis can be found in the sub-directory: C:\WINDOWS\Desktop\Laboratory 116\Sealite and NRaD.
10
-------
1.3 REFERENCE TOXICANT TEST WITH MARINE AMPHIPODS
TESTING FACILITY: SPAWAR SYSTEMS CENTER
BIOASSAY LABORATORY (RM 116)
CODE 71750
53475 STROTHE RD.
BLDG. 111
SAN DIEGO, CA 92152
I. OBJECTIVE: This method estimates the acute (96 h) toxicity of a reference toxicant to
amphipods using 3-5 mm individuals, in a 96 h, water only, non-renewal exposure. Reference
toxicant tests are used to evaluate quality of the test organisms1.
II NECESSARY MATERIALS AND SUPPLIES
Plastic holding tanks - 3 to 6L
Reference toxicant solution - Ammonia stock solution
graduated cylinders - Class A, borosilicate glass or non-toxic plastic labware, 5 0-1000ml for
making test solutions
pH meter - for measuring test solutions
Dissolved oxygen meter - for measuring test solutions
Refractometer - for determining salinity of test solutions
Thermometer - digital or laboratory grade
Dissolved Ammonia meter and probe - (prepare 24 hours in advance)
Test chambers - 1 L glass beakers or jars with lids
Colored labeling tape
Dilution water - natural seawater or hypersaline brine made from natural seawater and diluted
with deionized water
Pipets, automatic - adjustable, to cover a range of 0.01 to 5 ml and pipette tips
Calculator
Beakers- Class A, borosilicate glass or non-toxic plastic labware, 1 to 2 L for making test
solutions
Wash bottles - for reagent water, dilution water, for topping off graduated cylinders, for
rinsing small glassware and instrument electrodes and probes
Data sheets
Siphon tubes - for acclimation water changes
Pasteur pipettes - for collection of amphipods
Light box - for examining organisms
Glass dishes for counting and transferring amphipods
11
-------
PROTOCOL FOR CONDUCTING A 96 H REFERENCE TOXICANT TEST WITH AMPHIPODS
(Eohaustorius estuarius OR Rhepoxynius abronius) CONT'D
III METHODS
A. OBTAINING, FEEDING AND HOLDING ORGANISMS
1. Amphipods should be ordered within a week and at least three days prior to testing date to
allow for acclimation to testing conditions. Approximately 20% more amphipods than
needed for the test should be ordered.
2. Acclimation rates to test salinity and temperature should not exceed 3 ฐC and 3%o per 24
hours.
3. Determine arriving temperature, pH, and salinity.
4. Transfer amphipods to a large plastic container with sediment at the bottom in a 15 ฐC
temperature controlled room, incubator, or water bath. A squirt bottle filled with filtered
seawater can be used to help get amphipods off plastic bags or containers and into the
holding tanks. Remove dead by siphoning out of tank with a small rubber hose.
5. Each day prior to distribution of amphipods into beakers/jars, remove any dead, record
physical parameters (temp, pH, salinity, D.O.), perform a 50% water change with seawater
of the appropriate salinity and 15 ฐC seawater.
B CONDUCTING THE TEST
Day 0 (Hour 0)
1. Mix up the appropriate salinity seawater with the appropriate amount of reference toxicant (e.g.
cadmium, ammonia). Add 750 mL to each of at least 2 replicates per concentration.
2. Record water quality parameters (temperature, salinity, and D.O.) from one replicate of each
treatment on Day 0 and Day 4 of test.
3. Sieve amphipods from holding tray and place in a smaller plastic or glass container with test
seawater. Fill glass dishes with approximately 150 mL of test seawater. Select healthy and
active individuals with a transfer pipette and distribute in batches of 10 to glass dishes. The
number of amphipods in each dish should be verified by recounting before adding to test
chambers. Add one dish of 10 to each replicate.
4. Cover chambers with an opaque material or place in a dark room or enclosure and hold at
15ฐC.
12
-------
PROTOCOL FOR CONDUCTING A 96 H REFERENCE TOXICANT TEST WITH AMPHIPODS
(Eohaustorius estuarius OR Rhepoxynius abronius) CONT'D
Day 1 (Hour 24)
1. Measure and record temperature in one test chamber from each treatment every day
thereafter.
2. Note and remove any mortalities.
3. Lights must remain off or chambers must remain in the dark during the entire
exposure.
C. TEST TERMINATION
Day 4 (Hour 96)
1. Count surviving amphipods and record. Amphipods will occasionally "play dead".
Look for movement in the pleopods (back legs).
IV ANALYZING DATA
Using CETIS or Toxcalc 5.0, enter data retrieved from the survival endpoint to determine the LC50 or
other relevant toxicity metric. Please refer to "Protocol for Statistical Analysis ofToxicity Data"2.
'Modified from "U.S. EPA Methods for Assessing the Toxicity of Sediment-associated Contaminants with Estuarine and Marine Amphipods" June
1994 EPA 600/R-94/025
2 "Protocol for Statistical Analysis of Toxicity Data" can be found in the sub-directory : C:\WINDOWS\Desktop\Laboratory
116\Protocolsand log
13
-------
1.4 SEDIMENT TOXICITY TEST WITH MARINE AMPHIPODS
TESTING FACILITY: SPAWAR SYSTEMS CENTER
BIOASSAY LABORATORY (RM 116)
CODE 71750
53475 STROTHE RD.
BLDG. 111
SAN DIEGO, CA 92152
I. OBJECTIVE: This method estimates the acute (10 day) toxicity of whole sediment to amphipods
using 3-5 mm individuals, in 10 d non-renewal exposures. Amphipods are intimately associated
with sediment by nature of their burrowing or tube-dwelling and feeding habits, thus making them
suitable species for sediment toxicity testing1.
II NECESSARY MATERIALS AND SUPPLIES
Plastic holding tanks - 3 to 6L
Graduated cylinders - Class A, borosilicate glass or non-toxic plastic labware, 5 0-1000ml for
making test solutions
pH meter - for measuring test solutions
Dissolved oxygen meter and probe - for measuring test solutions
Dissolved Ammonia meter and probe - (prepare 24 hours in advance)
Refractometer - for determining salinity of test solutions
Thermometer - digital or laboratory grade
Test chambers - 1 L glass beakers or jars with lids
Colored labeling tape
Dilution water - natural seawater or hypersaline brine made from natural seawater and diluted
with deionized water
Pipets, automatic - adjustable, to cover a range of 0.01 to 5 ml and pipette tips
Calculator
Beakers- Class A, borosilicate glass or non-toxic plastic labware, 1 to 2 L for making test
solutions
Wash bottles - for reagent water, dilution water, for topping off graduated cylinders, for
rinsing small glassware and instrument electrodes and probes
Data sheets
Siphon tubes - for acclimation water changes
Pasteur pipettes - for collection of amphipods
Light box - for examining organisms
Glass dishes for counting and transferring amphipods
Turbulence reducer - to prevent disturbance of sediment when adding overlying water
Air grid and filter
Plastic tubing
1 mm sieves
Plastic buckets - for sieving sediment
Spatulas - nylon, fluorocarbon or polyethylene
14
-------
PROTOCOL FOR CONDUCTING A 10 D SEDIMENT SURVIVAL TEST WITH AMPHIPODS Cont'd
III METHODS
A. OBTAINING, FEEDING AND HOLDING ORGANISMS
1. Amphipods should be ordered within a week and at least three days prior to testing
date to allow for acclimation to testing conditions. Approximately 20% more
amphipods than needed for the test should be ordered.
2. Acclimation rates to test salinity and temperature should not exceed 3 ฐC and 5%o per
24 hours.
3. Determine arriving temperature, pH, and salinity.
4. Transfer amphipods to a large plastic container with sediment at the bottom in a 15 ฐC
temperature controlled room, incubator, or water bath. A squirt bottle filled with
filtered seawater can be used to help get amphipods off plastic bags or containers and
into the holding tanks. Remove dead by siphoning out of tank with a small rubber
hose.
5. Each day prior to distribution of amphipods into beakers/jars, remove any dead, record
physical parameters (temp, pH, salinity, D.O.), perform a 50% water change with
seawater of the appropriate salinity and 15 ฐC seawater.
B. CONDUCTING THE TEST
1. TEST PREPARATION
Day-1
a. Sediments should be stored at 4ฐC and be tested within two weeks after collection1.
Press-sieving (1mm) all sediments (including control and reference) should be
performed if there is concern about the presence of predatory organisms, large
debris, or organisms taxonomically similar to the test species. Ensure that nearly
all sediment is pressed through sieve to prevent composition change in sediment.
Wash sieves between samples with acetone sparingly, then rinse well with
deionized water. Also rinse spatulas, spoons and other utensils between samples.
b. Take note of sediment homogeneity and grain size.
c. Add 2 cm of homogenized sediment to each beaker/jar. Settle the sediment by
either tapping the side of the test chamber against the hand or smoothing with a
nylon, fluorocarbon or polyethylene spatula.
d. Add 750 mL of 20%o seawaterto each replicate. To minimize disruption of
sediment as seawater is added, use a turbulence reducer. Position the turbulence
reducer just above the sediment surface and raised slowly as seawater is added.
e. Cover all replicates and ensure gentle (approx. 100 bubbles/minute) aeration.
15
-------
PROTOCOL FOR CONDUCTING A 10 D SEDIMENT SURVIVAL TEST WITH AMPHIPODS Cont'd
2. ADDITION OF AMPHIPODS
DayO
f. Measure and record physical parameters (temp., salinity, DO, pH, ammonia) for
overlying water in one replicate. Pour off overlying water of the same replicate
and remove sediment for centrifugation to make Day 0 pore water measurements if
required.
g. Sieve amphipods from sediment in holding tray and place in a smaller plastic or
glass container with test seawater. Fill glass dishes with approximately 150 mL of
test seawater. Select healthy and active individuals with a transfer pipette and
distribute in batches of 10 to glass dishes. The number of amphipods in each dish
should be verified by recounting before adding to test chambers. Add two dishes of
10 to each replicate (20 animals total). Be sure to select dishes randomly.
h. After addition of animals, examine beakers/jars for animals that have been injured
or stressed. These individuals will not burrow into sediment and should be
removed and replaced. Eohaustorius estuarius generally burrows in 5 - 10
minutes. Record the number of amphipods that are replaced.
3. TEST MAINTENANCE
Days 1-10
a. On Day 1, salinity, pH, D.O., and temperature from overlying water should be
measured from a replicate of each treatment every day thereafter.
b. Note and remove any mortalities.
c. Check aeration in each chamber.
d. Lights must remain on during the entire exposure.
C. TEST TERMINATION
1. On Day 10, measure water quality (salinity, pH, D.O. and temperature) and ammonia
from overlying and pore water (if needed) from one replicate of each treatment.
2. Pour approximately half of the overlying water over a 1 mm sieve. Use remaining
water to loosen sediment by swirling gently. Place the 1 mm sieve over a plastic bucket
and pour sediment onto sieve. Using a spray bottle with seawater of the appropriate
salinity, wash sediment through sieve.
3. Transfer amphipods into a counting dish. Be very careful not to leave any amphipods
on the sieve during this process.
4. Count surviving amphipods and record. Amphipods will occasionally "play dead".
Look for movement in the pleopods (back legs).
16
-------
PROTOCOL FOR CONDUCTING A 10 D SEDIMENT SURVIVAL TEST WITH AMPHIPODS Cont'd
VI ANALYZING DATA
A. Two sample comparisons can be done using a t-test to detect a significant
departure from the control and each treatment. * Please refer to "Protocol for
Statistical Analysis ofToxicity Data"2.
'Modified from "U.S. EPA Methods for Assessing the Toxicity of Sediment-associated Contaminants with Estuarine and Marine Amphipods" June
1994 EPA 600/R-94/025
Protocol for Statistical Analysis ofToxicity Data can be found in the sub-directory : C:\WINDOWS\Desktop\Laboratory
116\Protocols and logs
17
-------
1.5 EMBRYO-LARVAL DEVELOPMENT TEST WITH SAND DOLLARS
TESTING FACILITY: SPAWAR SYSTEMS CENTER
BIOASSAY LABORATORY 116
CODE 71750
53475 STROTHE RD.
BLDG. 111
SAN DIEGO, CA 92152
I. OBJECTIVE: This method estimates the chronic toxicity of effluent and receiving waters to the
embryos and larvae of sand dollars (Dendraster excentricus). The test endpoint is normal larval
development and may include mortality.
II NECESSARY MATERIALS AND SUPPLIES
Refractometer - for determining salinity
Thermometers - glass or electric, laboratory grade for measuring water temperatures
DO and pH meters - for routine physical and chemical measurements
Balance - Analytical, capable of accurately weighing to O.OOOlg.
Graduated cylinders - Class A, borosilicate glass or non-toxic plastic labware, 5 0-1000ml for
making test solutions.
Volumetric flasks - Class A, borosilicate glass or non-toxic plastic labware, 100-lOOOml for
making test solutions.
Plastic holding tanks - 3 to 6L
Test chambers - 20ml glass scintillation vials and caps - pre-soaked in dilution water.
Colored labeling tape
Dilution water - natural seawater or hypersaline brine made from natural seawater and diluted
with deionized water
Biological microscope and slides
Pipets, automatic - adjustable, to cover a range of 0.01 to 5 ml and pipette tips
Calculator
Wash bottles - for reagent water, dilution water, for topping off graduated cylinders, for
rinsing small glassware and instrument electrodes and probes
Inverted microscope - for inspecting gametes and counting embryos and larvae.
Counter, two unit, 0-999 - for recording counts of embryos and larvae
Beakers, 5-10ml borosilicate glass for collecting sperm from sand dollars
Beakers, 1,000 ml for rinsing and settling sea urchin eggs.
Vortex mixer - to mix sea urchin semen in tubes prior to sampling.
Hemocytometer - for counting sperm
Siphon hose - for removing water from settled eggs
18
-------
PROTOCOL FOR 72 HOUR ECHINODERM LARVAL DEVELOPMENT TEST WITH SAND DOLLARS
(Dendraster excentricus) Cont'd
III. METHODS
A. OBTAINING AND HOLDING ORGANISMS
1. Obtain ripe sand dollars from an uncontaminated subtidal area (i.e. mouth of Mission Bay) on
morning of test setup and hold in tanks (e.g. cold room) with raw flowing seawater (target
holding/conditioning temperature is 10 - 14 ฐC) until they are needed for testing. Holding and
conditioning tanks should be drained and sprayed with fresh water at least once weekly to
prevent accumulation of organic matter and bacteria. Dead animals should be removed daily.
B. SPAWNING AND FERTILIZATION
1. Pour 20-30 ml seawater into 100 ml beakers for females and 25 ml in 25-50 ml beakers for
males and place in 15 ฐC incubator.
2. Carefully place sand dollars in a container lined with moist paper towels.
3. Inject 0.5 ml of 0.5 M KC1 into oral cavity of each sand dollar, cleaning needle with hot water
between injections if sex of sand dollar is not known to prevent cross contamination. Record
injection time on data sheet.
4. Swirl sand dollar for a few seconds then place back on moist paper towels.
5. When gametes begin to shed, note time, and separate sexes. Place males onto 25-50 ml
beakers and females onto 100 ml beakers both oral side up. Spray eggs and sperm of sand
dollar into beaker with a wash-bottle. It is optimal to obtain gametes from at least 3 spawning
individuals of each sex.
6. After confirming good motility of each sperm sample under the microscope, combine equal
quantities from up to four males, and store in refrigerator or on ice until use within 4 h.
7. Observe egg quality under the microscope for each spawning female. Pool quality eggs (i.e.
normal size, regular shaped and absence of germinal vesicle) into a 100 ml or 250 ml graduated
cylinder, bring volume up and cover with parafilm and keep at 15 ฐC.
8. Confirm fertilization success by placing a drop of eggs onto a well slide with a small amount of
sperm. Check for fertilization membrane. If no fertilization membrane present isolate new
eggs.
9. To determine the egg density the egg stock will need to be diluted. Always cut pipette
tip so that it is at least 2 mm wide. First, label two scint vials A and B, then fill each
with 9 ml of filtered seawater. Next, add 1ml of the concentrated egg stock to vial A invert
gently several times, then add 1ml of vial A to vial B. Count 1 ml from vial B in a
Sedgewick-Rafter counting cell. If the count is less than 30, count Vial A. Vial A
represents a 1:10 dilution and vial B represents a 1:100 dilution.
19
-------
PROTOCOL FOR 72 HOUR ECHINODERM LARVAL DEVELOPMENT TEST WITH SAND DOLLARS
(Dendraster excentricus) Cont'd
10. Using the volume of concentrated egg stock determined by the equation on the Egg/Sperm
count page, prepare egg stock in dilution water at the final target concentration of 1000
eggs/ml. Check prepared solution by counting eggs again.
11. Recommended sperm to egg ratio for fertilization is 500:1.tests.
C. SPERM DILUTION
Note: If able to decant overlying water the final sand dollar sperm density is usually
between 2x10A9 and 2xlOA10 sperm/ml.
See the Protocol for Counting Sperm with a Hemocytometer for instructions on how to count
sperm. With experience, the amount of sperm required for successful fertilization can be
estimated, avoiding the need for precise cell counts.
D. FERTILIZATION
Add calculated volume of sperm dilution to the egg dilution for a 500 sperm: legg ratio and mix
gently. Wait 10 minutes and check for fertilization. If fertilization is not at least 90%, add a second
volume of sperm dilution, wait 10 minutes and re-check. If fertilization is still not 90%, test must
be restarted with different gametes. Once again, with experience, the amount of sperm to add can
be estimated eliminating the need for precise counts.
IV CONDUCTING THE TEST
A. REFERENCE TOXICANT TESTS
1. Prepare reference toxicant stock and dilutions. Make up a 1 ppm stock using 200 \i\ of 1 ppt
copper solution in 199.8 mL dilution water. Make dilutions according to species sensitivity and
add 10 mL of each concentration to scintillation vials. In general, five replicates per treatment
are used, plus one additional vial for water chemistry. Cover and place in 15 ฐC to equilibrate
for at least 30 minutes.
2. New, seawater leached scintillation vials containing 10 mL of test solution are pre-cooled to 15
ฐC. To each vial, inject 0.25 mL fertilized eggs. It is important to be sure that the eggs are
homogenized during additions. This is accomplished by frequently mixing the contents of the
flask with a combination of gentle swirling and back and forth motions, or using a perforated
plunger.
3. The embryos should be incubated for 72 hours in the test chambers at 15 ฐC at ambient light
level (16 h light and 8 h dark). If controls have not achieved the pluteus stage after 72 h, the
exposure can be extended up to 96 hours.
4. Terminate test by addition of ImL of concentrated Formaldehyde and record the time.
20
-------
PROTOCOL FOR 72 HOUR ECHINODERM LARVAL DEVELOPMENT TEST WITH SAND DOLLARS
(Dendraster excentricus) Cont'd
B. EFFLUENTS, RECEIVING WATERS, AND OTHER SAMPLES
1. Test should begin within 36 hours of sample collection (USEPA 2002).
2. Prepare sample dilutions. Add 10 mL of each concentration to scintillation vials. In general,
five replicates per treatment are used, plus one additional vial for water chemistry. Cover and
place in 15 ฐC chamber to equilibrate.
3. Once scintillation vials have reached 15 ฐC, add embryos using a cut pipette tip. Be sure that
embryo stock is always homogenized. This is accomplished by frequently mixing the contents
of the flask with a combination of gentle swirling and back and forth motions, or using a
perforated plunger.
4. The embryos should be incubated for 72 hours in the test chambers at 15 ฐC and at ambient
laboratory light levels (16 h light and 8 h dark). If controls have not achieved the pluteus stage,
the exposure can be extended up to 96 hours.
5. Terminate test by addition of 1ml of concentrated Formaldehyde. Record the time.
6. Additional notes:
Additional vials with site samples may need to be collected for water quality and
chemistry.
Be sure to adequately homogenize sample before addition to vials and before taking
water quality measurements.
If samples are salted up with hypersaline brine, be sure to incorporate a brine control.
V. DATA COLLECTION
A. Observe embryos within one week of preservation. For each test replicate, the proportion of normal
to abnormal larvae will be determined. Please refer to "Protocol for counting larvae with an
inverted microscope1".
VI ANALYZING DATA
A. Using CETIS or Toxcalc, enter data retrieved from counting to determine the EC50, LOEC,
NOEC, or other appropriate toxicity metric. Please refer to "Protocol for Statistical Analysis of
Toxicity Data3".
B. In accordance with USEPA (2002), all Toxcalc-generated concentration-response curves will be
evaluated for acceptability.
'Modified from "Short-Term Methods for Estimating the Chronic Toxicity of Effluents and Receiving Waters to Marine and Estuarine Organisms".
First edition. EPA/600/R-95/136. August 1995.
"Protocol for Counting larvae with an inverted microscope" can be found in the sub-directory : C:\WINDOWS\Desktop\Laboratory 116\Protocols
and logs
3 "Protocol for Statistical Analysis of Toxicity Data" can be found in the sub-directory : C:\WINDOWS\Desktop\Laboratory 116\Protocols and logs
21
-------
1.6 EMBRYO-LARVAL DEVELOPMENT TEST WITH PURPLE SEA URCHINS
TESTING FACILITY: SPAWAR SYSTEMS CENTER
BIOASSAY LABORATORY (RM 116)
CODE 71750
53475 STROTHE RD.
BLDG. 111
SAN DIEGO, CA 92152
I. OBJECTIVE: This method estimates the chronic toxicity of effluent and receiving waters, pore
water, and other seawater samples to the embryos and larvae of echinoderms (the sea urchin
Stronglyocentrotus purpuratus) relative to control or reference samples. The test endpoint is
normal larval development and may include mortality.
II NECESSARY MATERIALS AND SUPPLIES
Refractometer - for determining salinity
Thermometers - glass or electric, laboratory grade for measuring water temperatures
D.O. and pH meters - for routine physical and chemical measurements
Balance - Analytical, capable of accurately weighing to O.OOOlg.
Graduated cylinders - Class A, borosilicate glass or non-toxic plastic labware, 5 0-1000ml for
making test solutions.
Volumetric flasks - Class A, borosilicate glass or non-toxic plastic labware, 100-1000ml for
making test solutions.
Plastic holding tanks - 3 to 6L
Test chambers - 20ml glass scintillation vials and caps - pre-soaked in dilution water.
Colored labeling tape
Dilution water - natural seawater or hypersaline brine made from natural seawater and diluted
with deionized water
Biological microscope and slides
Pipets, automatic - adjustable, to cover a range of 0.01 to 5 ml and pipette tips
Calculator
Wash bottles - for reagent water, dilution water, for topping off graduated cylinders, for
rinsing small glassware and instrument electrodes and probes
Inverted microscope - for inspecting gametes and counting embryos and larvae.
Counter, two unit, 0-999 - for recording counts of embryos and larvae
Beakers, 5-10ml borosilicate glass for collecting sperm from sand dollars
Beakers, 1,000 ml for rinsing and settling sea urchin eggs.
Vortex mixer - to mix sea urchin semen in tubes prior to sampling.
Hemocytometer - for counting sperm
Siphon hose - for removing water from settled eggs
Sieves - 80 jam, 20 jam and 25 jam
22
-------
PROTOCOL FOR 72 HOUR ECHINODERM LARVAL DEVELOPMENT TEST WITH SEA URCHINS
(Strongylocentrotus purpuratus) Cont'd
III METHODS
A. OBTAINING AND HOLDING ORGANISMS
1. Obtain ripe sea urchins from an uncontaminated subtidal area (e.g. mouth of Mission Bay) on
morning of test setup and hold in tanks (e.g. cold room) with raw flowing seawater (target
holding/conditioning temperature is 12 - 14 ฐC) until they are needed for testing. Kelp should
be added to tanks as a food supply. Holding and conditioning tanks should be drained and
sprayed with fresh water at least once weekly to prevent accumulation of organic matter and
bacteria. Dead animals should be removed daily.
B. SPAWNING
1. Pour 0.45 um filtered seawater into 100 mL beakers for females and place in 15 ฐC incubator.
Smaller (e.g. 25-50 mL) beakers can be used for males.
2. Carefully remove urchins from holding tanks to prevent damage to tube-feet, and place in a
container lined with moist paper towels to prevent reattachment.
3. Inject 0.5 mL of 0.5 M KC1 into soft periostomal membrane of each urchin, rinsing the needle
with hot water between injections if sex of urchins is not known to prevent cross contamination.
Record injection time on data sheet.
4. Swirl urchin for a few seconds, then place onto the beakers, oral side down.
5. When gametes begin to shed, note time, and separate sexes. Let females shed eggs into
seawater-filled beakers oral side down. It is optimal to obtain at least 3 spawning individuals
from each sex.
6. Collect sperm from each male in 25-50 mL beakers, with minimal dilution. After confirming
good motility of each sperm sample under the microscope, combine equal quantities from three
to four males and use within 4 h.
7. Observe egg quality under the microscope for each spawning female. Pool quality eggs (i.e.
normal size, regular shaped and absence of germinal vesicles) into a 1 L beaker. Pass eggs
through an 80 jam mesh screen (the eggs will pass through and debris is retained on screen).
8. Pass sperm stock through a 25 jam mesh screen (sperm will pass through and debris are retained
on screen).
9. Confirm fertilization success by placing a drop of eggs onto a well slide with a small amount of
sperm. Check for fertilization membrane. If no fertilization membrane is present, isolate new
eggs.
10. To determine the egg density, the egg stock will need to be diluted. Always cut pipette tip so
that it is 2 mm wide to prevent damage to eggs. First, label two scint vials A and B, then fill
each with 9 mL of filtered seawater. Next, add 1 mL of the egg stock to vial A invert
23
-------
PROTOCOL FOR 72 HOUR ECHINODERM LARVAL DEVELOPMENT TEST WITH SEA URCHINS
(Strongylocentrotus purpuratus) Cont'd
gently several times, then add 1ml of vial A to vial B. Count 1 mL from vial B in a Sedgewick-
Rafter counting cell. If the count is less than 30, count Vial A. Vial A represents a 1:10 dilution and
vial B represents a 1:100 dilution.
11. Using the volume of concentrated egg stock determined by the equation on the
Egg/Sperm count page, dilute to 20-50 eggs / mL for fertilization.
C. FERTILIZATION
1. Add sperm to the diluted egg stock at 15 ฐC. Sperm should be added at a density of
approximately 105 to 107 sperm/mL in the final mixture. Sperm density can be confirmed with
a hemacytometer (see Protocol for Counting Sperm with a Hemocytometer). With experience,
precise sperm counts are not necessary (sperm should make diluted egg stock very slightly
cloudy). Wait 10-15 minutes and check for complete fertilization. If fertilization is not at least
90%, add a second volume of sperm stock, wait 10 minutes and re-check. If fertilization is still
not 90%, test must be restarted with different gametes.
2. After adequate fertilization has been achieved, gently pour embryo stock over a 20 jam mesh
screen to remove any excess sperm and debris (embryos will be retained on screen while sperm
and debris will pass through). Gently rinse embryos on screen with filtered seawater.
3. Re-concentrate embryo stock solution to desired density (e.g. 2000 embryos / mL).
IV CONDUCTING THE TEST
7. REFERENCE TOXICANT TESTS
a. Prepare reference toxicant stock and dilutions. Make up a 1 ppm sub-stock using 200 joL of
1 ppt Copper stock in 199.8 mL dilution water. Make dilutions according to species
sensitivity and add 10 mL of each concentration to scintillation vials. In general, five
replicates per treatment are used, plus one additional vial for water chemistry. Cover and
place in 15 ฐC to equilibrate for at least 30 minutes.
b. Scintillation vials containing 10 mL of each test concentration should have been pre-cooled
to 15 ฐC. To each vial, add 100 \\L embryos being sure that the embryo stock is always
homogenized. This is accomplished by frequently mixing the contents of the flask with a
combination of gentle swirling and back and forth motions, or using a perforated plunger.
c. The embryos should be incubated for at least 72 hours in the test chambers at 15 ฐC at
ambient laboratory light levels (16 h light and 8 h dark). If controls have not achieved the
pluteus stage by 72 hours, the exposure can be extended up to 96 hours.
d. Terminate test by addition of 1 mL of concentrated Formaldehyde. Record the time.
24
-------
PROTOCOL FOR 72 HOUR ECHINODERM LARVAL DEVELOPMENT TEST WITH SEA URCHINS
(Strongylocentrotus purpuratus) Cont'd
8. EFFLUENTS, RECEIVING WATERS, AND OTHER SAMPLES
e. Test should begin within 36 hours of sample collection (USEPA 2002).
f. Prepare sample dilutions. Add 10 mL of each concentration to scintillation vials. In
general, five replicates per treatment are used, plus one additional vial for water chemistry.
Cover and place in 15 ฐC to equilibrate.
g. Once scintillation vials have reached 15 ฐC, add embryos using a cut pipette tip. Be sure
that embryo stock is always homogenized during the additions. This is accomplished by
frequently mixing the contents of the flask with a combination of gentle swirling and back
and forth motions, or using a perforated plunger.
h. The embryos should be incubated for 72 hours in the test chambers at 15 ฐC and at ambient
laboratory light levels (16 h light and 8 h dark). If controls have not achieved the pluteus
stage, the exposure can be extended up to 96 hours.
i. Terminate test by addition of 1ml of concentrated Formaldehyde. Record the time.
Additional vials with site samples may need to be collected for water quality and
chemistry.
Be sure to adequately homogenize sample before addition to vials and before taking
water quality measurements.
If samples are salted up with brine addition, be sure to incorporate a brine control.
V. DATA COLLECTION
A. Observe embryos within one week of preservation. For each test replicate, the proportion of normal
to abnormal larvae will be determined. Please refer to "Protocol for counting larvae with an
inverted microscope ".
VI ANALYZING DATA
A. Using CETIS or Toxcalc, enter data retrieved from counting to determine the EC50, LOEC,
NOEC, or other appropriate toxicity metric. Please refer to "Protocol for Statistical Analysis of
Toxicity Data3".
B. In accordance with USEPA (2002), all Toxcalc-generated concentration-response curves will be
evaluated for acceptability.
1 Modified from "Short-Term Methods for Estimating the Chronic Toxicity of Effluents and Receiving Waters to Marine and Estuarine Organisms".
First edition. EPA/600/R-95/136. August 1995.
"Protocol for Counting larvae with an inverted microscope" can be found in the sub-directory : C:\WINDOWS\Desktop\Laboratory 116\Protocols
and logs
3 "Protocol for Statistical Analysis of Toxicity Data" can be found in the sub-directory : C:\WINDOWS\Desktop\Laboratory 116\Protocols and logs
25
-------
1.7 ACUTE TOXICITY TEST WITH JUVENILE MYSID SHRIMP
Testing Facility: SPAWAR SYSTEMS CENTER
BIOASSAY LABORATORY (RM 116)
CODE 71750
53475 STROTHE RD.
BLDG. 111
SAN DIEGO, CA 92152
I. OBJECTIVE: This method estimates the acute (96 h) toxicity of effluents and receiving waters to
the mysid using three to five day old juveniles, in a 96 h static-renewal exposure1. Mysids are
exposed to effluent samples via dilution series experiments (typically 5 concentrations plus a
control). Receiving water tests are conducted using undiluted receiving water alongside a negative
control.
II NECESSARY MATERIALS AND SUPPLIES
Plastic holding tanks - 3 to 6L
Reference toxicant solution - Ippt copper stock solution
graduated cylinders - Class A, borosilicate glass or non-toxic plastic labware, 5 0-1000ml for
making test solutions
pH meter - for measuring test solutions
Dissolved oxygen meter - for measuring test solutions
Refractometer - for determining salinity of test solutions
Thermometer - digital or laboratory grade
Test chambers - 300ml glass beakers
Watch glasses - for covering test chambers
Colored labeling tape
Dilution water - natural seawater or hypersaline brine made from natural seawater and diluted
with deionized water
Pipets, automatic - adjustable, to cover a range of 0.01 to 5 ml and pipette tips
Calculator
Beakers- Class A, borosilicate glass or non-toxic plastic labware, 1 to 2 L for making test
solutions
Wash bottles - for reagent water, dilution water, for topping off graduated cylinders, for
rinsing small glassware and instrument electrodes and probes
Data sheets
Brine Shrimp, Artemia, culture unit
Separatory funnels, 2L - two for culturing Anemia
Siphon tubes (Tygon tubing) - for test solution renewal
Light box - for examining organisms
Parafilm
26
-------
PROTOCOL FOR CONDUCTING A 96 HOUR SURVIVAL TEST WITH THE MYSID (Americamysis bahia)
Cont'd
III. METHODS
A. OBTAINING, HOLDING AND FEEDING ORGANISMS
1. Mysids should be 1-3 days old at time of shipping, so that they will be approximately
3-5 days old at start of test.
2. Prepare Artemla culture on day of mysid order so that there are freshly hatched nauplii
available when the mysids arrive. Hatching takes 24-36 h at 20 ฐC. Please refer to
"Protocol for preparing Artemia nauplif'2.
3. Upon receipt of mysids, open plastic bag and determine arrival temperature, pH, D.O.
and salinity. Record values on the "Organism Arrival Log" sheet.
4. Provide gentle aeration by placing an airstone in the bag.
5. Transfer mysids to a large plastic holding tank (3-6 L) in a 20 ฐC temperature
controlled room, incubator, or water bath. The easiest way to transfer is to place open
plastic bag in holding tank and cut open bottom of bag with a razor blade. Gently pull
up on bag, releasing mysids into the container. A squirt bottle filled with filtered
seawater can be used to help get mysids off plastic and into the tank. Remove dead by
siphoning out of tank with Tygon tubing.
6. Perform approximately 50% water change with filtered (0.45 jam) seawater adjusted to
20 ฐC. Be sure seawater is within 2 %o and 2 ฐC of the arriving conditions. If the
salinity is below the desired level (usually 34 %o), adjust by no more than 2 %o per day.
7. Collect newly hatched Artemla nauplii. Pipette nauplii so that each mysid receives
about 100 nauplii per day.
8. Each day prior to distribution of mysids into beakers, remove any dead, record physical
parameters (temp, pH, salinity, DO), perform a 50% water change with filtered 20 ฐC
seawater of the appropriate salinity, and feed.
B. TEST SETUP
1. Test should begin within 36 hours of sample collection (USEPA 2002).
2. Randomly distribute 10 larvae to each 300 ml glass beaker, using a 5 ml plastic pipette
with the lowest 0.5 cm cut off to prevent injury. Be sure beaker has a few ml of
filtered seawater to cushion entry. It is generally easiest to track and count mysids
with the holding tank and beakers on a light table.
27
-------
PROTOCOL FOR CONDUCTING A 96 HOUR SURVIVAL TEST WITH THE MYSID (Americamysis bahia)
Cont'd
3. After all required beakers have been filled with test solutions, mark them either with
numbers from a randomization chart or with the test concentration and replicate (e.g.
A, B, or C). If using random numbers, ensure that identification of each number is
written down and stored in a safe place for referral after mortality assessment. Test
results will be meaningless if you don't know what the exposure was!
4. Feed all replicates with Anemia.
C. TEST MAINTENANCE
Day 0 (Hour 0)
1. Measure and record physical parameters (temp., salinity, DO, pH, ammonia) for all
samples and concentrations.
2. Make up dilutions. Dilutions for samples lower in salinity than desired are
generally "salted up", or adjusted to the testing salinity with synthetic sea salt
(Crystal Sea MarineMix, Bioassay Grade). The copper reference dilutions are
made from clean, filtered 0.45-|j,m seawater (i.e. Scripps) and a 5 ppm copper
solution prepared in filtered seawater on the day of test setup (from Ippt master
stock solution).
3. Siphon off as much water from beakers as possible without stressing the
mysids. Replenish with 200 ml of the appropriate dilution just prepared.
Siphon and replenish one beaker before moving on to next one to reduce stress
on mysids.
4. Measure and record physical parameters from one replicate from each test
solutions or test concentration. If D.O. is below 4.0 mg/L in any concentration
for a test, aerate all beakers for that test. Provide a gentle bubble rate (no more
than 100 bubbles/minute).
5. Be sure test organisms have been fed.
DAY 1 (Hour 24)
1. Measure and record physical parameters.
2. Note and remove any mortalities.
3. Feed mysids with Artemia nauplii.
DAY2 (Hour 48)
1. Measure and record physical parameters.
2. Note and remove any mortalities.
3. Prepare fresh dilutions as on Day 0 using same effluent sample.
28
-------
PROTOCOL FOR CONDUCTING A 96 HOUR SURVIVAL TEST WITH THE MYSID (Americamysis bahia)
Cont'd
4. Siphon off all but approx. 10% of sample, and replenish beakers with appropriate
dilution that was just prepared.
5. Feed mysids with Artemia nauplii.
DAY3 (Hour 72)
1. Measure and record physical parameters.
2. Note and remove any mortalities.
3. Feed mysids with Artemia nauplii.
DAY4 (Hour 96)
1. Measure and record physical parameters.
2. Make final mortality observations and record.
3. Terminate tests by pouring contents of beakers through a sieve into sink. Surviving
mysids should be sacrificed by freezing or other humane methods.
IV. ANALYZING DATA
Using CETIS or Toxcalc, enter mortality data obtained from the test at 48- and/or 96-hour exposure periods
to determine the LC50, LOEC, NOEC, or other relevant toxicity metrics. Please refer to "Protocol
for Statistical Analysis of Toxicity Data"3.
In accordance with USEPA (2002), all Toxcalc-generated concentration-response curves will be evaluated
for acceptability.
1 Modified from "Methods for Measuring the Acute Toxicity of Effluents and Receiving Waters to Freshwater and Marine Organisms". Fifth
Edition. EPA/821/R/02/012. October 2002.
2 "Protocol for preparing Artemia nauplii" can be found in the sub-directory : C:\WINDOWS\Desktop\Laboratory 116\Protocols and logs
3 "Protocol for Statistical Analysis of Toxicity Data" can be found in the sub-directory : C:\WINDOWS\Desktop\Laboratory 116\Protocols and logs
29
-------
1.8 ACUTE TOXICITY TEST WITH TOPSMELT LARVAE
TESTING FACILITY: SPAWAR SYSTEMS CENTER
BIOASSAY LABORATORY (RM 116)
CODE 71750
53475 STROTHE RD.
BLDG. 111
SAN DIEGO, CA 92152
I. OBJECTIVE: This method estimates the acute (96 h) toxicity of effluents and receiving waters to
topsmelt (Atherinops affinis) larvae static- renewal exposure. Topsmelt are exposed to effluent
samples via dilution series experiments (typically 5 concentrations plus a control). Receiving water
tests are typically conducted using full strength (100%) sample, and are compared with control
performance.
II NECESSARY MATERIALS AND SUPPLIES
Plastic holding tanks - 3 to 6L
Reference toxicant solution - Ippt copper stock solution
Graduated cylinders - Class A, borosilicate glass or non-toxic plastic labware, 5 0-1000ml for
making test solutions
pH meter - for measuring test solutions
Dissolved oxygen meter - for measuring test solutions
refractometer - for determining salinity of test solutions
Thermometer - digital or laboratory grade
Test chambers - 400ml glass beakers
Watch glasses - for covering test chambers
Colored labeling tape
Dilution water - natural seawater or hypersaline brine made from natural seawater and diluted
with deionized water
Pipets, automatic - adjustable, to cover a range of 0.01 to 5 ml and pipette tips
Calculator
Beakers- Class A, borosilicate glass or non-toxic plastic labware, 1 to 2 L for making test
solutions
Wash bottles - for reagent water, dilution water, for topping off graduated cylinders, for
rinsing small glassware and instrument electrodes and probes
Data sheets
Brine Shrimp, Artemia, culture unit
Separatory funnels, 2L - two for culturing Anemia
Siphon tubes - for test solution renewal
Light box - for examining organisms
Parafilm
30
-------
PROTOCOL FOR CONDUCTING A 96 HOUR SURVIVAL TEST WITH TOPSMELT LARVAE
(Atherinops affinis) Cont'd
III METHODS
A. OBTAINING HOLDING AND FEEDING ORGANISMS
1. Fish should be approximately 7-10 days old at time of shipping, so that they will fall within
the 9-15 day requirement for conducting the test.
2. Prepare Anemia culture so that there are freshly hatched nauplii available when the fish
arrive. Hatching takes 24-36 h at 20 ฐC. Please refer to "Protocol for preparing Artemia
nauplii"2.
3. Upon receipt of fish, open plastic bag and determine arriving temperature, pH, salinity, and
D.O.
4. Provide gentle aeration by inserting an airstone into the bag.
5. Transfer fish to one or two large plastic holding tanks (6 L) in a 20 ฐC temperature
controlled room, incubator, or water bath. One easy way to transfer from the bag is to
place the open plastic bag in plastic holding tank and cut open bottom of bag with a razor
blade. Gently pull up on bag, releasing fish into the container. A squirt bottle filled with
filtered seawater can be used to retrieve any fish adhered to the bag. Remove dead by
siphoning out of tank with a small rubber hose.
6. Perform a -50% water change with filtered (0.45 jam) seawater adjusted to 20 ฐC. Be sure
seawater is within 2 %o and 2 ฐC of the arriving conditions. If the salinity is below desired,
adjust by no more than 2 %o per day.
7. Collect newly hatched Anemia nauplii. Pipette nauplii so that each fish larva receives
about 40 nauplii at each feeding. Feed two times a day.
8. Each day prior to distribution offish into beakers, remove any dead, record physical
parameters (temp, pH, salinity, DO), perform -50% water change with filtered 20 ฐC
seawater, and feed.
B. TEST SETUP
1. Test should begin within 36 hours of sample collection (USEPA 2002).
2. Randomly distribute 5 larvae to each 400 ml glass beaker using a 5 ml plastic pipette with
the lower 0.5 cm cut off to prevent injury. Be sure beaker has a few ml of filtered seawater
to cushion entry. Fill to 200 ml marking on beaker with test solution. It is generally
easiest to track and count fish with holding tank and beakers on a light table (there is one in
Rm. 116).
31
-------
PROTOCOL FOR CONDUCTING A 96 HOUR SURVIVAL TEST WITH TOPSMELT LARVAE
(Atherinops affinis) Cont'
3. After all required beakers have been filled, mark them either with numbers from a
randomization chart or with the test concentration and replicate (i.e. A, B, C, or D).
If using random numbers, ensure that identification of each number is written down and
stored in a safe place for referral after mortality assessment. Test results will be
meaningless if you don't know what the exposure was!
4. Distribute Artemia to all replicates.
C. TEST MAINTENANCE
DAY0 (Hour 0)
1. Measure and record physical parameters (temp., salinity, DO, pH, ammonia) for all
samples and test concentrations.
2. Make up dilutions. 800 mL of each test concentration will be required to fill four
replicates. The copper reference dilutions are made from clean, filtered 0.45-|om seawater
(i.e. Scripps) and a 5 ppm copper stock solution prepared in filtered seawater on the day of
test setup (from Ippt stock solution).
3. Siphon off as much water from beakers as possible without stressing fish. Replenish with
200 ml of the appropriate dilution just prepared. Siphon and replenish one beaker before
moving on to next one to reduce stress on fish.
4. Measure and record physical parameters for one replicate from each test concentration or
test sample. If D.O. is below 4.0 mg/L in any concentration for a test, aerate all beakers for
that test. Provide a gentle bubble rate (no more than 100 bubbles/minute).
5. Be sure test organisms are fed two times a day.
DAY 1 (Hour 24)
1. Measure and record physical parameters.
2. Note and remove any mortalities.
3. Feed two times as usual (morning and evening).
IMF2 (Hour 48)
1. Measure and record physical parameters.
2. Note and remove any mortalities.
3. Prepare fresh dilutions as on Day 0 using same effluent sample.
4. Siphon off all but approx. 25 ml of sample, and replenish beakers with appropriate dilution
that was just prepared.
5. Feed two times as usual (morning and evening).
32
-------
PROTOCOL FOR CONDUCTING A 96 HOUR SURVIVAL TEST WITH TOPSMELT LARVAE
(Atherinops affinis) Cont'd
DAY3 (Hour 72)
1. Measure and record physical parameters.
2. Note and remove any mortalities.
3. Feed two times as usual (morning and evening).
DAY4 (Hour 96)
1. Measure and record physical parameters.
2. Make final mortality observations and record.
3. Terminate tests by pouring contents of beakers through a sieve into sink. Surviving fish
should be sacrificed by freezing or other humane methods.
IV ANALYZING DATA
Using CETIS or Toxcalc, enter mortality data obtained from the test at 48- and/or 96-hour exposure periods
to determine the LC50, LOEC, NOEC, or other relevant toxicity metrics. Please refer to "Protocol
for Statistical Analysis of Toxicity Data"3.
In accordance with USEPA (2002), all Toxcalc-generated concentration-response curves will be evaluated
for acceptability.
1 Modified from "Methods for Measuring the Acute Toxicity of Effluents and Receiving Waters to Freshwater and Marine Organisms". Fifth
Edition. EPA/821/R/02/012. October 2002.
2 "Protocol for preparing Artemia nauplii" can be found in the sub-directory : C:\WINDOWS\Desktop\Laboratory 116\Protocols and logs
3 "Protocol for Statistical Analysis of Toxicity Data" can be found in the sub-directory : C:\WINDOWS\Desktop\Laboratory 116\Protocols and log
33
-------
2.0 TEST CONDITIONS AND ACCEPTABILITY CRITERIA
2.1 BIVALVE EMBRYO-LARVAL DEVELOPMENT TEST (CHRONIC)
Oyster (Crassostrea gigas) or Mussel (Mytilus galloprovincialis)
Test Type
Salinity
Temperature
Light quality
Light intensity
Photoperiod
Test Chamber type/size
Test solution volume
No. Larvae/test chamber
No. of replicate chambers/concentration
Dilution water
Test Concentrations
Dilution factor
Test Duration
Test acceptability criteria
Endpoint measured
static-nonrenewal
30 ฑ 2 ppt
20 ฑ 1 ฐC (oysters) and 15 or 18 ฑ 1 ฐC (mussels)
ambient laboratory illumination
10-20 uE/m2/s (Ambient laboratory levels)
16 h light/ 8 h darkness
20ml
10ml
150-300
4 or 5
Uncontaminated lum filtered natural seawater or
hypersaline brine prepared from natural seawater
Effluent: Minimum of 5 and a control; 0, 6.25,12.5, 25, 50, 100%
Copper Ref. Tox.; 0, 4.1, 8.4, 12, 17.2, 24, 35 ppb
Receiving waters: 100% receiving water and a control.
Effluents: > 0.5 Receiving waters: > 0.5
48h
> 70% survival in controls (oysters), and
> 50% survival in (Mussels); > 90% normal
development of shell with surviving controls. MSD of <25%.
Survival and normal shell development
Criteria from EPA's Short Term Methods for Estimating the Chronic Toxicity of Effluents and Receiving
Waters To West Coast Marine and Estuarine Organisms. EPA/600/R-95/136. August 1995
34
-------
2.2 SEDIMENT-WATER INTERFACE (SWI) TOXICITY TEST WITH BIVALVE
EMBRYOS
For mussel (Mytilus galloprovincialis)
Test Type
Salinity
Temperature
Light quality
Light intensity
Photoperiod
Test Chamber type/size
Test solution volume
No. Larvae/test chamber
No. of replicate chambers/concentration
Dilution water
Test Concentrations
Dilution factor
Test Duration
Test acceptability criteria
Endpoint measured
static -nonrenewal
30 ฑ 2 ppt
15 or 18 ฑ 1 ฐC
ambient laboratory illumination
10-20 uE/m2/s (Ambient laboratory levels)
16 h light/ 8 h darkness
Polycarbonate tubing with polyethylene mesh
300-500 ml
150-300
4 or 5
Uncontaminated lum filtered natural seawater or
hypersaline brine prepared from natural seawater
Copper Ref. Tox.; 0, 4.1, 5.9, 8.4, 12, 17.2, 24, 35 ppb
Receiving waters: 100% receiving water and a control.
Receiving waters: None or > 0.5
48h
> 70% normal survival
Survival and normal shell development
Criteria from EPA's Short Term Methods for Estimating the Chronic Toxicity of Effluents and Receiving
Waters To West Coast Marine and Estuarine Organisms. EPA/600/R-95/136. August 1995
35
-------
2.3 MARINE AMPHIPOD REFERENCE TOXICITY TEST
For Eohaustorius estuarius or Rhepoxynius abronius
Test Type
Salinity
Temperature
Light quality
Photoperiod
Test Chamber type/size
Test solution volume
No. of organisms/chamber
No. of replicate chambers/concentration
Dilution water
Test Concentrations
Aeration
Test Duration
Test acceptability criteria
Endpoint measured
Water-only test
20 ppt (E. estuarius); 30 ppt (R. abronius), ฑ 1 ppt
15 ฑ 1ฐC
Chambers should be kept in dark or covered with opaque material
24 hours dark : 0 hours light
1 L glass beaker or jar with ~10 cm ID.
750 mL (minimum)
10 (minimum) / chamber
1 minimum : 2 recommended
Uncontaminated sand filtered natural seawater or
hypersaline brine prepared from natural seawater
Ammonia: 0, 37.5, 75, 150, 300, 600 mg/L for E. estuarius
Ammonia: 0, 18.75, 37.5, 75, 15, 300 mg/L for ft abronius
Cadmium: 0, 1.5, 3, 6, 12 mg/L forE. estuarius
Cadmium: 0, 0.125, 0.25, 0.5, 1, 2 mg/L for ft abronius
Control and at least 5 test concentrations (0.5 dilution factor)
Recommended; but not necessary if >90% D.O. saturation can
be achieved without aeration
96 hours
minimum mean control survival > 90% Survival
Survival
Criteria from EPA's Methods for Assessing the Toxicity of Sediment-associated
Contaminants with Estuarine and Marine Amphipods. (EPA/600/R-94/025 June 1994)
36
-------
2.4 SEDIMENT TOXICITY TEST WITH MARINE AMPHIPODS (ACUTE)
For Eohaustorius estuarius or Rhepoxynius abronius
Test Type
Salinity
Temperature
Light quality
Light intensity
Photoperiod
Test Chamber type/size
Test solution volume
No. of organisms/chamber
No. of replicate chambers/concentration
Dilution water
Aeration
Test Duration
Test acceptability criteria
Endpoint measured
whole sediment toxicity test - static non-renewal
20 ppt (E. estuarius) ฑ 1 ppt; 30 ppt (R. abronius) ฑ 1 ppt
15ฑ1ฐC
wide-spectrum fluorescent lights
50-1000 lux
24 hours light : 0 hours dark
1 L glass beaker or jar with ~10 cm ID.
2cm sediment : 750 mL overlying water
20 / chamber
at least 4, with at least one additional for chemistry
Uncontaminated sand filtered natural seawater or
hypersaline brine prepared from natural seawater
Recommended; but not necessary if >90% D.O. saturation can
be achieved without aeration
10 day
minimum mean control survival > 90% survival
Survival
Criteria from EPA's Methods for Assessing the Toxicity of Sediment-associated
Contaminants with Estuarine and Marine Amphipods. (EPA/600/R-94/025 June 1994)
37
-------
2.5 BIOLUMINESCENCE INHIBITION TEST (QWIKLITE) WITH
DINOFLAGELLATES
For Ceratocorys horrida
Test Type
Salinity
Temperature
Light quality
Light intensity
Photoperiod
Test Chamber type/size
Test solution volume
Age of test organism
No. of replicate chambers/concentration
Dilution water
Test Concentrations
Dilution factor
Test Duration
Test acceptability criteria
Endpoint measured
static, non-renewal
34 ฑ 2 ppt
19 ฑ 1ฐC
ambient laboratory illumination
10-20 uE/m /s (Ambient laboratory levels)
12 h light/ 12 h darkness
4.5 ml cuvettes
3 ml / replicate
12-20 days
50-100 cells/ml
at least 4
Uncontaminated lum filtered natural seawater or
hypersaline brine prepared from natural seawater
Effluent: Minimum of 5 and a control; 0, 6.25,12.5, 25, 50, 100%
Copper Ref. Tox.; 0, 15.6, 31.3, 62.5, 125, 250 ppb
Receiving waters: 100% receiving water and a control.
Effluents: > 0.5 Receiving waters: None or > 0.5
24 hours
at least 106 PMT counts in controls
bioluminescence inhibition
Modified from ASTM Standard Guide for Conducting Toxicity Tests With Bioluminescent Dinoflagellates. Designation E 1924 - 97.
38
-------
2.6 ECHINODERM EMBRYO-LARVAL DEVELOPMENT TEST (CHRONIC)
For Strongylocentrotuspurpuratus or Dendraster excentricus
Test Type
Salinity
Temperature
Light quality
Light intensity
Photoperiod
Test Chamber type/size
Test solution volume
No. of replicate chambers/concentration
Dilution water
Test Concentrations
Dilution factor
Test Duration
Test acceptability criteria
Endpoint measured
static non-renewal
34 ppt ฑ 2 ppt
15ฑ1ฐC
ambient laboratory illumination
10-20 uE/m /s (Ambient laboratory levels)
16 h light: 8 h darkness
20 ml Scintillation vials
10ml
at least 4
Uncontaminated lum filtered natural seawater or
hypersaline brine prepared from natural seawater
Effluent: Minimum of 5 and a control; 0, 6.25,12.5, 25, 50, 100%
Copper Ref. Tox.; 0, 4.1, 8.4, 12, 17.2, 24, 35 ppb
Receiving waters: 100% receiving water and a control.
Effluents: > 0.5 Receiving waters: 100% and a control
72-96 h
at least 80% Normal development in the controls (USEPA 1995);
MSD <25%
Normal development; mortality can be included
39
-------
2.7 MYSID SHRIMP SURVIVAL TEST (ACUTE)
For Americamysis bahia
Test Type
Salinity
Temperature
Light quality
Light intensity
Photoperiod
Test Chamber type/size
Test solution volume
Renewal of test solutions
Age of test organism
No. Larvae/test chamber
No. of replicate chambers/concentration
Source of food
Feeding regime
Cleaning
Aeration
Dilution water
Test Concentrations
Dilution factor
Test Duration
Test acceptability criteria
Sample volume required
Endpoint measured
static-renewal
5-34 (ฑ 2 ppt)
20 ฑ 1 ฐC
ambient laboratory illumination
10-20 uE/m2/s (Ambient laboratory levels)
16 h light/ 8 h darkness
300ml
200 ml/replicate
48 hour minimum
1-5 days; 24-h range in age
10
minimum, 2 for effluent tests, minimum, 4 for receiving water tests
Newly hatched Artemia nauplii (less than 24 h old)
Feed 40 nauplii per larvae twice daily, morning and night
cleaning not required
None, unless DO concentration falls below 4.0 mg/L,
then aerate all chambers.
Uncontaminated lum filtered natural seawater or
hypersaline brine prepared from natural seawater
Effluent: Minimum of 5 and a control; 0, 6.25,12.5,25,50,100%
Copper Ref. Tox.; 0, 94, 127, 169, 225, 300, 350 ppb
Receiving waters: 100% receiving water and a control.
Effluents: > 0.5 Receiving waters: None or > 0.5
Acute: 96 h; Chronic: 7 d
90% or greater survival in controls
2L per renewal
Effluents: Survival (e.g. LC50)
Receiving waters: Survival (Significant Difference from control)
40
-------
2.8 TOPSMELT LARVAL SURVIVAL TEST (ACUTE)
For Atherinops affmis
Test Type
Salinity
Temperature
Light quality
Light intensity
Photoperiod
Test Chamber type/size
Test solution volume
Renewal of test solutions
Age of test organism
No. Larvae/test chamber
No. of replicate chambers/concentration
Source of food
Feeding regime
Cleaning
Aeration
Dilution water
Test Concentrations
Dilution factor
Test Duration
Test acceptability criteria
Sample volume required
Endpoint measured
static-renewal
15-34 ppt (ฑ 2 ppt of the selected test salinity)
21 ฑ 1 ฐC
ambient laboratory illumination
10-20 uE/m /s (Ambient laboratory levels)
16 h light / 8 h darkness
400ml
200 ml / replicate
48 hour minimum
9-15 days post-hatch
10
minimum, 2 for effluent tests, minimum, 4 for receiving water tests
Newly hatched Artemia nauplii
Feed 40 nauplii per larvae twice daily, morning and night
cleaning not required
None, unless D.O. concentration falls below 4.0 mg/L,
then aerate chambers. Rate should be less than 100 bubbles/min.
Uncontaminated lum filtered natural seawater or
hypersaline brine prepared from natural seawater
Effluent: Minimum of 5 and a control; 0, 6.25,12.5,25,50,100%
Copper Ref. Tox.; 0, 56, 100, 180, 320 ppb
Receiving waters: 100% receiving water and a control.
Effluents: > 0.5 Receiving waters: None or > 0.5
Acute: 96 h, Chronic: 7d
90% or > survival in controls
2L per day
Effluents: Survival (LC50)
Receiving waters: Survival (Significant Difference from control)
41
-------
3.0 PROCEDURES FOR EQUIPMENT
3.1 PROTOCOL FOR AUTOCLAVE
The autoclave is a device used for sterilizing objects by exposing them to steam at above
atmospheric pressure (and thus at a temperature above the normal boiling point of water)1.
The Autoclave is found in the Rm 127, down the hall from the Bioassay Lab.
Turn water valve on (orange valve located on the wall to the left of the autoclave). On position
is vertical, while the off position is horizontal.
1. Switch main power on by pulling the lever down (lever located on the wall to the right and
behind the autoclave).
2. Place glassware and stoppers in metal tray inside autoclave.
3. Close autoclave door and turn handle to the right until tightened (locking mechanism will move
into place).
4. Set Sterilizing dial to 20 minutes (Located on right hand side of autoclave).
5. Set Exhaust dial to 10 minutes (Located below sterilizing dial).
6. Turn red on/off switch to regular (switch located on autoclave below door).
7. Turn power switch to the "on" position.
8. Buzzer will indicate when cycle is finished*.
9. Check that chamber pressure gauges are at zero before opening autoclave door.
10. Open autoclave door slowly to release steam.
11. Glassware may be HOT!! Use protective gloves when removing glassware.
12. Leave autoclave door slightly ajar.
13. Turn all switches back to the off positions.
14. Turn light off.
* As of July 2004, the sterilization timer is broken. Please take note of sterilization time in order to
manually switch off.
1 http://www.webster-dictionary.net/definition/Autoclave
42
-------
3.2 CALIBRATION AND USE OF THE ORION 720A ISE METER/AMMONIA PROBE
I. STORAGE OF AMMONIA PROBE
A. Between measurements, keep tip immersed in a 10~3 or 10 ppm standard with ISA added.
For low-level measurements, keep tip in pH 4 buffer between measurements.
B. For overnight or week-long storage, place electrode tip in a 0.1 M or 1000 ppm standard
w/o ISA.
C. For storage over a week, disassemble completely and rinse the inner body, outer body,
and bottom cap with D.I. water. Dry and reassemble electrode without filling solution or
membrane.
II. PROBE CALIBRATION
A. Calibration must be performed every time meter is used.
B. Plug in meter.
C. Look on back of meter to see which input the electrode is plugged in to. Make sure this is
the number on the prompt line. If not, press the 2nd key, and then channel repeatedly
until selected input is displayed.
D. Using the 0.1M NH4+ standard, prepare concentrations that bracket the expected sample
range and differ in concentration by a factor often.
Example: if sample concentration is estimated to range from 0-50 ppm, make up 3
calibration solutions such as 0.1 ppm, 10 ppm, 100 ppm. These bracket the range
and differ by a factor often from each other. Since the 0.1 M NFL,+ standard is
equivalent to 1700 ppm, use CiVi=c2v2 to solve for dilutions;
For the O.lppm solution: (1700 ppm)(vO=(0.1 ppm)(1000 mL)
(vi)= .058 mL or 58 uL of 1700 ppm in 999.94 mL of deionized water
For the 10 ppm solution: (1700 ppm)(vi)=(10 ppm)(100 mL)
(vi)= 0.588 mL or 588 uL of 1700 ppm in 99.41 mL of deionized water
E. Measure 25 mL of the more dilute standard into a 30 mL beaker.
F. Add 0.5 mL ISA and stir thoroughly.
G. Select concentration mode by pressing mode until "CON" is displayed. Then press 1st -
Calibration, when asked enter number of standards to be measured and press 2 or 3
depending on how many standards are being used, then yes.
H. Rinse electrode with deionized water then blot dry.
I. Place electrode in beaker and stir moderately.
43
-------
PROTOCOL FOR CALIBRATING THE ORION 720AISE METER AND ORION AMMONIA PROBE Cont'd
J. When "READY ENTER VALUE" is displayed on prompt line, enter value of standard
and press yes.
K. Example: For the 0.1 ppm dilution, type 0.100 on keypad and press yes.
L. The meter automatically switches to standard 2. Rinse electrode and add 0.5 mL of ISA
to the second standard.
M. Place electrode in beaker and stir moderately.
N. When "READY ENTER VALUE" is displayed, once again enter value of 2nd standard
and press yes.
O. Repeat steps 8-10 for the 3rd standard.
P. The electrode slope is then calculated and displayed. Slope should be within the range of
-54 to -60.
III. MEASUREMENTS
A. After calibration meter will automatically proceed to "MEASURE" mode.
B. Place electrode into sample, when "RDY" is displayed and meter beeps, record sample
results.
IV. NFL.+PROBE TROUBLESHOOTING
1. Membrane life can be anywhere from one week to several months. If there are any dark
spots or discoloration on the membrane it needs to be changed. Follow instructions on
page 4 of the Orion Ammonia electrode instruction manual.
2. Obtaining the slope (slope= Ain mV/ tenfold A in concentration) provides the best means
for checking electrode operation, (page 6 of electrode instruction manual)
1. Place 100 mL of DI water in a 150 mL beaker.
2. Add 2 mL of IS A and stir.
3. Set the function switch to mV mode.
4. Rinse electrode with deionized water and place in solution.
5. Pipet ImL of 0.1 M NH4 into beaker and record mV's when reading is stable.
6. Next, pipet 10 mL of 0.1 M NH4 solution into the same beaker. Stir thoroughly
and measure mV reading when stable.
7. The difference between the first and second reading should be between -54 to -
60 mV/decade.
3. If electrode slope is low during operation, check electrode inner glass body, (page 24 of
electrode instruction manual)
1. This is done by first soaking the inner glass body in filling solution for at least
two hours, if it has been dry.
44
-------
PROTOCOL FOR CALIBRATING THE ORION 720AISE METER AND ORION AMMONIA PROBE Cont'd
2. Next, rinse inner-body with deionized water and immerse in 200 mL of pH 7
buffer w/ 0.1 M NaCl added. Assure that reference element is covered, stir and
record stable mV reading.
3. Rinse in DI water and immerse in 200 mL of pH 4.0 buffer with 0.1M NaCl
added.
4. Watch the change in meter readings carefully. The reading should change 100
mV in less than 30 seconds after immersion.
5. After 3-4 minutes the reading should stabilize, the difference between the pH 7
and pH 4 should be greater than 150 mV.
V. METER TROUBLESHOOTING
A. The set up and self-test should be performed on the meter. Easy to follow instructions
are on page 6 of the Orion manual for the 720A meter.
B. Next, run the checkout procedure on page 10 of the same book mentioned in the
previous step. If you receive any error codes, go to the back of the manual for further
troubleshooting tips.
45
-------
3.3 CALIBRATION AND USE OF THE ACCUMET PH METER
Calibration should be performed at least once daily and about every hour (once measurements begin) for
more accurate results since the electrode's slope and zero potential may change overtime.
Note: Meter should be on Channel A for pH readings. It should be on Channel A already, but if it is not,
press "Channel" until it reads "A" only.
I. PROBE CALIBRATION
A. Press "Standardize" and select "2" to clear existing standards.
B. Press "Standardize" again and select "1" to add the first standard.
C. Obtain fresh yellow pH 7.0 buffer solution and pour about 15 mL into 20 mL scintillation
vial and add a small magnetic stir bar.
D. When the Buffer Value screen appears type in "7.0" and press Enter.
E. The Prepare Buffer/Standard screen will appear.
F. Remove electrode from pH 4.0 or 7.0 storing solution, rinse with deionized water, and blot
dry.
G. Place pH electrode inside 7.0 buffer solution with magnetic stir plate on low.
H. Press Enter.
I. When accurate reading of buffer value is displayed, press the enter key to manually accept
the reading.
J. Repeat these steps for the second standard (pH 10.0).
K. When accurate reading of buffer value is displayed, press the enter key to manually accept
the reading.
L. Press "Slope/Efficiency" button and ensure efficiency is 100 ฑ 2%.
M. If efficiency is poor, recalibrate with fresh standards.
II. MEASUREMENTS
A. Rinse electrode with deionized water.
B. Blot dry electrode with a KimWipe.
46
-------
PROTOCOL FOR CALIBRATION AND USE OF THE ACCUMET pH METER Cont'd
C. Immerse electrode in sample, stirring gently (i.e. with magnetic stirrer).
D. Wait for pH reading to stabilize, and record value. The electrode also provides the
temperature, if needed.
E. Rinse electrode with deionized water between samples.
F. Store rinsed electrode in pH 4.0 or 7.0 storage solution when finished.
47
-------
3.4 CALIBRATION AND USE OF THE ORION (MODEL 840) DISSOLVED OXYGEN
PROBE
Calibration should be performed at least once daily and about every hour (once measurements begin) for
more accurate results.
I. BEFORE USE
A. Be sure sponge in calibration sleeve is saturated with distilled or deionized water.
B. If probe has been disconnected from instrument or silver anode has been cleaned, it must
be reconnected and allowed to polarize for 20 to 50 minutes before use.
II. CALIBRATION
A. Turn meter on by depressing "On/Off button.
B. Depress and hold down "Mode" button until display cursor is at "Cal". As long as the
Mode key is depressed, the display will cycle. *Be sure calibration sleeve is completely
covering probe and the probe is lying flat on lab counter during calibration steps.
C. Depress quickly and release the Mode key. The word "SAL" will appear on display and
then the salinity will appear. Adjust as necessary with up and down arrows.
D. After correct salinity is entered, quickly depress the mode key again and three dashes ()
should appear on the display.
E. After a few moments, the slope of the electrode/membrane will be displayed. It should
read between 0.7 and 1.2. If it does not, see Troubleshooting below.
III. SAMPLE MEASUREMENTS
A. Remove calibration sleeve. You are now ready to make D.O. measurements.
B. Depress Mode key to choose mg/L or %.
C. Immerse probe in sample, making sure the stainless steel thermistor is submerged.
D. Stir slowly so that flow rate past the membrane is approximately 15 cm/sec.
E. Take reading when the value on the display is stable. Also record temperature from
display window next to D.O. value.
F. Rinse in deionized water and return to calibration sleeve when finished.
48
-------
CALIBRATION AND USE OF THE ORION (MODEL 840) DISSOLVED OXYGEN PROBE Cont'd
IV. TROUBLESHOOTING
A. Slope out of range or an error message "El" indicates electrolyte may need replacement,
electrode cap is old, or electrodes need cleaning.
B. To replace electrolyte and cap, first disconnect probe from instrument.
C. Unscrew and discard old membrane cap.
D. Rinse electrode assembly with distilled water.
E. Moisten inside of new membrane with a few drops of electrolyte from the Probe Service Kit
that should be on the counter adjacent to the meter.
F. Completely fill membrane cap with electrolyte.
G. Holding probe at a slant, with the flat surfaced vent on top, insert electrode assembly vertically
into the new membrane cap and tighten cap quickly. Excess electrolyte will be expelled
through vent. If air bubbles are in the membrane cap, repeat procedure.
H. Plug probe back into instrument and allow approximately 20 minutes for repolarization.
I. Calibrate as before. If the slope still does not fall within range still, the electrode may need
cleaning. Refer to "Cleaning the Electrode" section of Orion 840 Instruction Manual.
49
-------
3.5 MEASUREING AMMONIA WITH THE HACK DR/2400 SPECTROPHOTOMETER
I. GETTING STARTED
A. Turn power on with the blue power on/off key on the far left side of the spectrophotometer.
B. The main menu will appear, if screen is hard to read turn on the backlight with the button that
has a light bulb symbol on it.
C. To select an operator, go to Instrument Setup and press Operator ID. Either select your
initials or enter new.
D. At the main menu select either Hach Programs or Favorite Programs, which contains
frequently used programs.
II. MEASURING NITROGEN AS AMMONIA (SALICYLATE METHOD, 385N OR 8155)
A. Select program 385N and press Start.
B. Fill a round 10 mL sample cell to the 10 mL mark with deionized water (this is the blank).
C. Fill another round 10 ml sample cell to the 10 mL mark with sample.
D. Add the contents of one Ammonia Salicylate powder pillow to each cell. Stopper and shake to
dissolve the powder.
E. Touch the timer icon. Touch OK to start a 3 minute reaction period.
F. When the timer beeps, add one Ammonia Cyanurate reagent powder pillow to each cell.
Stopper and shake to dissolve reagent.
G. Touch the timer icon. Touch OK to start a 15 minute reaction period. A green color will
develop if ammonia nitrogen is present.
H. When the timer beeps, wipe blank with a Kimwipe to remove fingerprints and place in cell
holder.
I. Touch Zero, display will show 0.00 mg/L.
J. Wipe the sample with a Kimwipe and place into holder.
K. Touch Read. Results will appear in mg/L - NH3-N (unionized). To read in NH3 or NH/ go to
Options. Select Chemical Form and select desired form.
L. When finished touch Return and sample value will be converted.
50
-------
PROTOCOL FOR MEASUREING AMMONIA WITH THE HACK DR/2400 SPECTROPHOTOMETER Cont'd
III. PREPARING AN AMMONIA NITROGEN STANDARD
A. Prepare a 0.20 mg/L ammonia nitrogen standard solution.
B. Dilute 2.00 Ml Ammonia Nitrogen Standard Solution (10 mg/L) to 100 mL with deionized
water.
C. To adjust the calibration curve using the reading obtained with the 0.20 mg/L standard
solution, touch Options on the program menu.
D. Touch Standard Adjust. Touch On. Touch Adjust to accept the displayed concentration.
51
-------
3.6 BARNSTEAD E PURE WATER PURIFICATION SYSTEM
The Barnstead E-Pure water purification system is used to produce deionized (reagent) water with
a resistivity of as high as 18.2 megohms/cm and TOC content of less than 10 ppb. The unit is
located on the wall near the fume hood in Rm 244. The following steps should be taken to obtain
E-Pure water:
A. Open orange-colored water valve every morning.
B. Turn pump on and monitor water resistivity.
C. When water has reached desired resistivity, open draw off valve to get water. Close
draw off valve.
D. Leave pump on.
E. At end of day, turn pump off & close water valve.
F. Cartridges are replaced on an as needed basis by Ignacio Rivera.
52
-------
3.7 CALIBRATION AND USE OF THE ORION APLUS (105A+) BASIC
CONDUCTIVITY METER
Choose standards that bracket expected sample values. Brackish water and seawater range from 1-100
milli-Siemens. The meter will shut off automatically after 20 minutes of non-use. To turn this feature off,
depress the mode button while turning the meter on. A low-pitched beep should indicate that auto shutoff
has been disabled. This feature will be reactivated when the meter is shut off and turned on again.
III. PROBE CALIBRATION
A. To turn on the meter, press the "on" button.
B. Disable the temperature compensation by depressing the "setup" button. Change the
number located at the bottom of the screen to 0.0 by pressing the "down arrow (T)"
button.
C. Press the "mode" button to return to measurement screen. Press "cal" button to initiate
calibration. The last cell constant used will appear on display.
D. Immerse conductivity cell in the standard. Agitate solution slightly to remove air bubbles
from probe.
E. Enter the cell constant printed on the cell cable (1.00), the decimal point can be moved by
pressing the up or down arrows. Press "yes" to accept cell constant value.
F. Meter will return to measurement mode, compare the displayed value with the standard at
its specified temperature value (see tables included with manual).
G. If the correct standard value is not displayed, calculate the cell constant adjustment factor
using the following formula:
Q = Standard value / Displayed Value
H. Multiply the initial cell constant (1.00) by Q. This is the new cell constant.
I. Repeat steps C-G.
J. If Displayed Value is still different from the Standard Value, calculate Q again (step G)
and multiply the derived Q by the previous cell constant.
K. Repeat steps C-G until the Standard Value and Displayed Value are the same.
Example:
Initial Cell Constant = 1.00
1st Standard Value = 9.288 (@ 21.4 ฐC)
1st Displayed Value = 9.01
Q = 9.288/9.01 = 1.0308 = new cell constant
53
-------
PROTOCOL FOR CALIBRATION AND USE OF THE ORION APLUS (105A+) BASIC CONDUCTIVITY METER
Cont'd
2nd Standard Value = 9.233 (@ 21.2 ฐC)
2nd Displayed Value = 9.29
Q = 9.233/9.29 = 0.9938
Multiply 1.0308 (last cell constant) X 0.9938 (newest cell constant) = 1.0244
3rd Standard Value = 9.215 (@ 21.1 ฐC)
3rd Displayed Value = 9.21
Because the Standard and Displayed Values are the same, the instrument is calibrated.
IV. MEASUREMENTS
A. Rinse conductivity cell with deionized water.
B. Blot cell with a Kimwipe.
C. Immerse cell in sample and agitate gently to remove air bubbles.
D. Press the "mode" button to move between conductivity and salinity.
E. Allow reading to stabilize.
F. For storage overnight or longer, conductivity cell should be clean and dry. While in use,
the cell can remain in deionized or seawater.
V. TROUBLESHOOTING
A. Check battery, 9V battery required and calibrate after battery change.
B. Run a self-test.
1. Disconnect the conductivity cell (probe).
2. Press and hold the "yes" button while pressing the "on/off button to turn meter
on.
3. This will cause the meter to perform an electronic hardware diagnostics test.
4. After test "7", a "0" will appear on display.
5. Press each key on meter, each key must be pressed within four seconds of the
previous key.
6. After test "7", the meter's display will read "test 8" and turn off.
7. An operator assistance code will be displayed if any errors are found.
8. See troubleshooting guide in manual for further instruction.
54
-------
3.8 CALIBRATION AND USE OF THE ORION (MODEL 830A) PORTABLE
DISSOLVED OXYGEN PROBE
Calibration should be performed at least once daily.
I. BEFORE USE
A. Be sure sponge in calibration sleeve is saturated with deionized water.
B. If the meter has been off for longer than 72 hours, it will need to re-polarize for 60
minutes.
C. Probe storage: for short-term storage (overnight or between measurements), probe should
remain plugged into meter and kept in the moist sleeve. For long-term storage, probe
should be disconnected from meter, membrane cap should be removed, and probe should
be stored cleaned and dry.
II. CALIBRATION
A. Turn meter on by pressing the "power" button.
B. To change salinity, simultaneously depress the "cal" and "power" button. Pressing the
"cal" button allows you to scroll through configuration options. After changing salinity to
the value of your sample using the up and down arrows, press "meas" key to return to
measure mode.
C. Press the "cal" button to enter the calibration mode. Press the "cal" button a second time to
begin calibration. Be sure calibration sleeve is completely covering probe and the probe is
lying flat on the lab counter during calibration steps.
D. A range value will appear. If the slope is out of the required range of 60-120%, "error" is
displayed.
E. To abort calibration, press the "meas" button at any time.
F. The display screen features a "Stat face" that resembles a smiley face. It provides
information on the electrode condition. If a sad face appears, calibration may be needed.
III. SAMPLE MEASUREMENTS
A. Remove calibration sleeve.
B. To change the measurement mode (ie. mg/L or % saturation), simultaneously press the
"cal" and "power" button. Pressing the "cal" button allows you to scroll through
configuration options. After choosing appropriate measurement, press "meas" key to return
to measure mode.
55
-------
CALIBRATION AND USE OF THE ORION (MODEL 830A) PORTABLE D.O. METER Cont'd
C. Immerse probe in sample, making sure the stainless steel thermistor is submerged.
D. Take measurement when the value on the display is stable, if Auto-read is on (indicated by
an "A" on the right hand side of the screen), the "A" will stop flashing when the reading is
stable. The temperature can also be recorded from the display window below the D.O.
value.
E. Rinse probe in deionized water and return to calibration sleeve when finished.
IV. TROUBLESHOOTING & MAINTENANCE
A. The display screen features a "Stat face" that resembles a smiley face. It provides
information on the electrode condition (slope, response time, etc.). Deterioration of
electrode condition is shown first by a straight face and then by the frowning of "Stat
face." An improvement can only take place after calibration.
B. The display screen also features what looks like a bulb with flashing lines coming from it.
This symbol is an indication of electrode response time. Response time can become
sluggish due to aging, lack of maintenance, or membrane tearing and fouling.
C. To replace electrolyte and membrane cap, first disconnect probe from instrument.
D. Unscrew and discard old membrane cap.
E. Fill the new membrane cap halfway with electrolyte solution (Polarographic DO Probe
Electrolyte 080514).
F. Holding probe at a slant, insert electrode assembly vertically into the new membrane cap
and tighten cap quickly. Excess electrolyte will be expelled through vent. If air bubbles
are in the membrane cap, repeat procedure.
G. Plug probe back into instrument and allow approximately 25 minutes for repolarization.
H. Calibrate. If the slope still does not fall within the required range, the electrode may need
cleaning. Use polishing paper to clean probe then repeat steps E-H.
I. Please consult manual for further troubleshooting and definitions of error messages.
56
-------
3.9 PERCIVAL SCIENTIFIC 136LL INCUBATOR
I. LIGHTING
A. To enter the Lights Menu, press the "LIGHTS" key. To navigate through the menu, use the
up and down arrow keys.
B. When the display reads "Light 1," press "ENTER." Switch the setting to "ON" or "OFF"
using the arrow keys. Press "ENTER" to accept the setting.
C. Use the arrow keys to scroll until the display reads "Light 2." Switch the setting to "ON"
or "OFF" using the arrow keys. Press "ENTER" to accept the setting.
D. To exit the Lights Menu, press the "LIGHTS" key.
II. TEMPERATURE MENU
A. To enter the Temperature Menu, press the "TEMP/ALARM" key. To navigate through the
menu, use the up and down arrow keys.
B. To set the temperature manually,
1. Press "ENTER" when the display reads "Manual Temp Set Pt."
2. The temperature reading will begin to flash. Use the up and down arrows
to change the set point to the desired temperature.
3. Press "ENTER" to accept value.
C. To set the temperature high safety setting,
1. Press "ENTER" when the display reads "Safety High Alarm."
2. The temperature will begin to flash. Use the up and down arrows to
change the display to the desired temperature, which is recommended to
be 3ฐC above the highest programmed temperature. When the temperature
gets higher than this value, a safety alarm will be triggered and the
incubator will shut down its control functions.
3. Press "ENTER" to accept value.
D. To set the temperature low safety setting,
1. Press "ENTER" when the display reads "Safety Low Alarm."
2. The temperature will begin to flash. Use the up and down arrows to
change the display to the desired temperature, which is recommended to
be 3ฐC below the lowest programmed temperature. When the temperature
gets lower than this value, a safety alarm will be triggered and the
incubator will shut down its control functions.
3. Press "ENTER" to accept value.
E. To exit the Temperature Menu, press the "TEMP/ALARM" key.
57
-------
PERCIVAL SCIENTIFIC 136LL INCUBATOR Cont'd
III. 96 STEP PROGRAM SETUP
A. Press the "PROG" key.
B. Use the up and down arrow keys to select "Enter/Edit 96 Step" and press "ENTER."
C. If a program has not been entered, a message will be given that there are no steps in the
profile. If a program has been entered, press the "PROG" key, select "Delete All Steps,"
and press "ENTER."
D. To add the first step,
1. Press the "PROG" key, select "Add Step," and press "ENTER."
2. Press the "TIME" key. Use the up and down arrows to change the time.
3. Press the "TEMP/ALARM" key. Use the up and down arrows to change the
temperature.
4. Press the "LIGHTS" key. Use the up and down arrows to change the lighting so
that "1" represents on and "0" represents off.
5. Press "ENTER" and verify that no settings are flashing.
E. To add the second step,
1. Press the "PROG" key, select "Add Step," and press "ENTER."
2. Follow steps D2-5.
IV. RUN 96 STEP PROGRAM
A. Press the "PROG" key
B. Use the up and down arrow keys to select "Run 96 Step" and press "ENTER."
V. SAMPLE 96 STEP PROGRAM
Below is a sample 96 Step Program for a 16 hour light: 8 hour dark cycle.
Step 1 9:00 am
15.0 C
LT11
Step 2 1:00 am
15.0 C
LT:00
58
-------
3.10 CALIBRATION AND USE OF THE OAKTON PH 11 METER
Calibration should be performed at least once daily for more accurate results.
VI. PROBE CALIBRATION
N. Make sure that the MODE on the meter is set to measure pH, as indicated in the upper right
corner of the display.
O. Remove the probe from the electrode storage bottle, rinse with deionized water, and shake
dry.
P. Place the electrode in pH 4.0 buffer solution and stir.
Q. Press CAL/MEAS. The CAL indicator will be shown.
R. When the measured pH value is stable, press the HOLD/ENTER key to confirm
calibration.
S. Rinse the electrode with deionized water and shake dry. Place the electrode in pH 7.0
buffer solution and stir.
T. Repeat steps D and E.
U. Rinse the electrode with deionized water and shake dry. Place the electrode in pH 10.0
buffer solution and stir.
V. Repeat steps D and E
W. When finished calibrating, the meter will automatically return to Measurement mode. If
this does not occur, press CAL/MEAS to return manually.
X. In Measurement mode, perform a calibration check using pH 7.0 buffer solution. If the
measured value is not within the required range, change buffer solutions and repeat
calibration.
VII. MEASUREMENTS
G. Rinse the electrode with deionized water and shake dry.
H. Immerse the electrode in sample and stir gently.
I. Wait for the pH reading to stabilize and record the value. The electrode will also provide a
temperature reading, if needed.
J. Rinse the electrode with deionized water between samples.
K. Store rinsed electrode in electrode storage bottle when finished.
59
-------
4.0 STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES- MISCELLANEOUS
4.1 GLASSWARE AND PLASTICWARE CLEANING
I. NEW PLASTICWARE
Rinse new plasticware with sample dilution water before use.
II. NEW GLASSWARE
New glassware must be soaked overnight in 10% acid, then rinse well in deionized water
and seawater.
III. NON-DISPOSABLE SAMPLE CONTAINERS, TEST VESSELS, PUMPS, TANKS
AND OTHER EQUIPMENT
Any equipment coming in contact with samples must be washed to remove surface
contaminants as described below:
1. Rinse with tap water several times.
2. Soak in tap water and 10% Liquinox or other detergent for at least 15 minutes, then scrub
with brush.
3. Rinse in tap water several times.
4. Rinse in 10% Nitric (HNO3) or hydrochloric (HC1) acid to remove scales, metals, and
bases. 10% =10 mL concentrated acid + 90 mL deionized water.
5. Rinse several times in deionized water.
6. If organic toxicant used, rinse once with pesticide grade acetone in fume hood.
7. Rinse three times with deionized water.
IV. SEDIMENT-WATER INTERFACE TUBES
A. AFTER USE
1. Soak in 10% Citranox or RB S for 24 hours.
2. Scrub screen surface and tube gently with brush and rinse 2-3 times in tap water.
3. Dip screen tubes in 10% nitric acid for 5-10 seconds.
4. Rinse thoroughly in deionized water.
B. PRIOR TO NEXT USE
1. Soak in seawater for 24 hours.
2. Rinse 3 times in deionized water.
60
-------
PROTOCOL FOR CLEANING GLASSWARE/PLASTICWARE (Cont'd)
V. CARBOYS
B. SEMI-ANNUALLY
1. Soak in -2% nitric acid solution for approximately one week, check that pH of acid
solution is below 2.00.
2. Rinse 3 times with deionized water.
3. When refilling with Scripps water, rinse the inside, nozzle and outside of the
carboy 2-3 times with seawater before refilling. Avoid touching the metal nozzle of
the hose inside the carboy.
VI. SEDIMENT CORE TUBES
A. AFTER USE
1. Soak in 10% Citranox or RBS for 24 hours.
2. Scrub tube gently with brush and rinse 2-3 times in tap water.
3. Dip core tubes in 10% nitric acid for 5-10 seconds.
4. Rinse thoroughly in deionized water.
B. PRIOR TO NEXT USE
1. Soak in seawater for 24 hours.
2. Rinse 2-3 times in deionized water.
VII. EMBRYO/LARVAL IN-SITU DRUMS
A. AFTER USE
1. Remove plastic screws from ends.
2. Soak in 10% Citranox or RBS for 24 hours.
3. Scrub screens very gently with brush and rinse 2-3 times in tap water.
4. Dip drums in 10% nitric acid for 5-10 seconds.
5. Rinse thoroughly in deionized water.
B. PRIOR TO NEXT USE
1. Soak in seawater for 24 hours.
2. Rinse 2-3 times in deionized water.
VIII. DINOFLAGELLATE FLASKS
A. AFTER USE
1. Soak in 10% Citranox or RBS for 24 hours.
61
-------
PROTOCOL FOR CLEANING GLASSWARE/PLASTICWARE (Cont'd)
2. Scrub with brush and rinse 2-3 times in tap water.
3. Place in 10% nitric acid for 5-10 seconds.
4. Rinse thoroughly (2-5 times) in deionized water.
B. PRIOR TO NEXT USE
1. Sterilize in autoclave (see protocol for using autoclave1)
IMPORTANT: All glassware must be soaked overnight in dilution water prior to use in each test.
62
-------
4.2 RECEIVING AND HOLDING TEST ORGANISMS
This protocol is intended for receiving and holding of mysid shrimp (Americamysis bahid),
topsmelt larvae (Atherinops a/finis), and inland silversides (Menidia beryllina):
1. Upon arrival, check temperature before placing into aquarium/holding tank (6 L or 22 L).
Test organisms should not be subjected to changes of more than 3 ฐC in water temperature
or 3 ppt salinity in any 12-hour period.
2. In order to acclimate animals, place shipping bag in clean aquarium/holding tank for at
least 60 minutes. After initial water quality measurements are taken, the top of the bag
should be propped open and water should be gently aerated. A small amount of food may
be added if the animals do not appear stressed.
3. After temperature in the shipping bag has approached appropriate holding temperature
(depending on test method), remove the shipping bag and add filtered seawater to the
holding tank.
4. Mysids: gently siphon mysids into holding tank using a wide-bore pipette and tygon
tubing. As mysid:water ratio in the shipping bag decreases, siphon out the excess water
into a clean beaker. When all of the mysids have been transferred, rinse the bag with
filtered sea water and check for mysids that may have stuck to the sides of the bag, also
check the excess water that was siphoned off into the clean beaker. Loading rate for mysids
should not exceed 20 mysids per liter.
Fish Larvae: Carefully siphon off extra water from the travel bag in order to concentrate
fish larvae. Gently pour larvae into clean holding tank. Be sure not to transfer any fish that
died during shipment. When bag level gets low, individually pipette larvae into holding
tanks using a wide-bore pipette. Loading rate for fish should not exceed 0.4 g fish per liter.
5. Gently aerate each holding tank with a small airstone.
6. Animals should be fed newly hatched Artemia nauplii liberally.
7. Check temperature frequently to make sure it is maintained at appropriate holding
temperature + 2 ฐC. If temperature is not maintained in range, organisms should be held
an additional day prior to testing. Organisms should be acclimated for at least 2 days prior
to testing.
8. Ensure that the photoperiod to be used during testing is being used during acclimation.
9. Renew holding water every other day or renew one half of the water every day. This
depends on the amount of fecal matter and density of animals in the holding tank. All fecal
matter, dead, etc. should be siphoned daily.
63
-------
PROCEDURE FOR RECEIVING/HOLDING TEST ORGANISMS (Americamysis bahia, Atherinops affmis,
and Menidia beryllina) Cont'd
10. If the organisms need to acclimate to the testing salinity, mix filtered sea water with the
appropriate amount of deionized water to obtain the desired salinity (do not adjust salinity
more than 3ppt in a 12-hr period) during water changes.
11. The following should be recorded during the holding period:
a. Condition of the organisms upon arrival and every day thereafter.
b. Temperature in holding tanks
c. Frequency of water change and siphoning
d. Dissolved oxygen level in holding tanks
e. Frequency and approximate quantity of feeding
f. General appearance of water (cloudy, clear, etc.) and organisms (active, dead, etc.)
12. Before disposal, any surviving test organisms are killed, generally by concentrating into a
container and freezing. Under no circumstances are test organisms ever released to the
wild or used more than once for testing.
64
-------
4.3 MAINTAINING DINOFLAGELLATE CULTURES
FACILITY: SPAWAR SYSTEMS CENTER
BIOASSAY LABORATORY (RM 116)
CODE 71750
53475 STROTHE RD.
BLDG. 111
SAN DIEGO, CA 92152
I. OBJECTIVE: To maintain organism health and propagation, dinoflagellate cultures need to be
split about every two weeks to so that they do not become too dense. Species being maintained
include; Lingulodinium polyedrum, Ceratacorys horrida, Pyrocystis noctiluca, Gonyaulax
grindleyii, Pyrocycstis lunula, and Pyrocystis fusiformis.
II. NECESSARY MATERIALS AND SUPPLIES
Beakers- 1 Liter, Class A, borosilicate glass- 3 or 4 for media
Pipets, automatic - adjustable, to cover a range of 0.01 to 5 ml and pipette tips
Watch glasses - for covering 1 L beakers
Colored labeling tape
Stock solutions A, B and C1
Erlenmeyer flasks - 5-10 acid washed and autoclaved for split cultures
Glass microscope slides - for examining dinoflagellate species
Light biological Microscope
Microwave
Foam stoppers - to stopper flasks with culture
III. METHODS
**Be aware of cross contamination! Wear gloves at all times, not allowing anything that will come in
contact with the inside of the flasks to touch countertops - use different pipette tips for each culture, etc.
A. ONE DAY PRIOR TO CULUTRE SPLIT
1. Sterilize all flasks and stoppers in the autoclave2.
2. Filter 2 to 3 (depending on how many cultures you will split) liters of seawater (collected from
the cold room in bldg. Ill) with 0.22 (im filter paper.
3. To each 1 Liter glass beaker add:
Stock A-15 mL
Stock B - 1 mL
Stock C - 0.5 mL
4. Add 1 L of filtered seawater to each beaker.
65
-------
PROTOCOL FOR MAINTAINING DINOFLAGELLATE CULTURES OF SEVERAL SPECIES Cont 'd
5. Heat in microwave for 25 minutes. Include a small beaker filled with deionized water for
possible evaporation.
6. Allow media to cool to room temperature (about 20 ฐC) overnight.
B. DAY OF CULTURE SPLIT
1. Remove a 25 mL aliquot from each beaker of media and take pH, salinity and temperature.
Salinity should be approximately 34 %o, pH from 8.0-8.1 and temperature range should be 19
ฐCฑ2ฐC.
2. Record data on the dinoflagellate log.
3. Choosing dinoflagellate stocks to split
a. Turn off the lights and return to the incubator.
b. Swirl each culture and move brightest (most dense) cultures to the front row.
c. Remove all flasks in front row, making sure that one of each six cultures is selected.
d. Depending on the culture density remove .020 mL to 1 mL and view under the microscope
to determine viability, presence of motility (for some species) and density.
4. Label all new flasks with current date and species name and strain (if applicable).
5. Rinse each sterilized flask with approximately 50 mL of medium.
6. Add approximately 50 mL into flask (to cushion entry of dinoflagellates).
7. For high density cultures (i.e. L. polyedrum) add 100 mL of culture in new flask then bring up
to 250 mL line with media.
8. For low-density cultures (P. noctiluca and C. horrida) add 125 mL of culture in new flask and
then bring up to the 250 mL line with media.
9. Additionally, bring source flask up to the 250 mL mark with new media.
10. Always assure that incubator is functioning at 19 ฐC when replacing cultures.
1 Please refer to "PROTOCOL FOR PREPARATION OF ENRICHED SEAWATER MEDIUM" located on: C:\Documents
and Settings\zacharia\Desktop\Laboratory 116\Protocols and logs
2 Please refer to "PROTOCOL FOR AUTOCLAVE" located on: C:\Documents and Settings\zacharia\Desktop\Laboratory
116\Protocols and logs
66
-------
4.4 PREPARATION OF ENRICHED SEAWATER MEDIUM (ESM)1
FACILITY: SPAWAR SYSTEMS CENTER
BIOASSAY LABORATORY (RM 116)
CODE 71750
53475 STROTHE RD.
BLDG. 111
SAN DIEGO, CA 92152
I. OBJECTIVE: This method allows one to prepare stock solutions that serve as growth medium for
algae, diatoms and dinoflagellates.
II NECESSARY MATERIALS AND SUPPLIES
Polycarbonate bottles - (3) 1 Liter
Deionized water
Graduated cylinders - Class A, borosilicate glass or non-toxic plastic labware, 5 0-1000ml for
making test solutions
Colored labeling tape
Pipets, automatic - adjustable, to cover a range of 0.01 to 5 ml and pipette tips
Calculator
Wash bottles - for topping off graduated cylinders
Analytical toploading scale - for measuring chemicals
III METHODS
A. MICRONUTRIENT STOCK SOLUTION (A)
1. For Cultures:
To a 1 L polycarbonate bottle, add 1 L deionized water and the following chemicals
in the order listed:
FeCl3 6H2O - 0.072 g
MnCl2-4H2O-0.144g
ZnSO4 7H2O - 0.045 g
CuSO4 5H2O - 0.157 mg (see below)
CoCl2 6H2O - 0.404 mg (see below)
H3BO3-1.140g
Na2EDTA- l.Og
Note: Analytical scales will not accurately measure some chemicals required in amounts below 1 mg. To obtain these amounts of
chemical accurately, see example below;
For CuSO4 5H2O - 0.157 mg, measure 0.157 g of chemical, and add to volumetric flask (100 mL). Fill flask to line and
invert several times. Use a 100 |iL aliquot to obtain correct amount of chemical. If using a different volumetric flask follow
example calculation:
for CoCl2 6H2O - 0.404 mg and a 200 mL flask; 0.404 mg / 100 |iL x 1 ml /1000 [iL = 4.04mg / 1 mL and if we are using
trying to create 200 mL of this solution, we need 4.04mg/lmL x200= 808 mg of chemical in 200 mL of deionized water, use
100 |iL of this solution for the correct amount of chemical. Check calculation: 808mg/200mL x 0.100mL= 0.404 mg.
67
-------
PROTOCOL FOR PREPARATION OF ENRICHED SEAWATER MEDIUM (ESM) Cont'd
2. For Bioassays:
Follow the same procedure, but omit copper (CuSO4 5H2O) and add only .05 g Na2EDTA
instead of 1.0 g.
B. MACRONUTRIENT STOCK SOLUTION (B)
1. For Diatoms (i.e. Skeletonema costatum):
To a 1 L polycarbonate bottle, add 1 L deionized water and the
following chemicals in the order listed:
K3PO4-3.0g
NaNO3 - 50.0 g
NaSiO3 9H2O - 20.0 g
2. For Dinoflagellates:
Do not add any NaSiO3 9H2O.
C. VITAMIN STOCK SOLUTION (C)
To a 1 L polycarbonate bottle, add 1 L deionized water and the following chemicals in the
order listed:
Thiamine hydrochloride - 500 mg
Biotin- 0.1 mg
B12-1.0mg
To renew dinoflagellate cultures, stock solutions are added to a sterile container containing natural
seawater that has been filtered through a 0.22 |j,m membrane filter in the following proportions:
Stock A: 15 mL / L of medium
Stock B: 1 mL / L of medium
Stock C: 0.5 mL / L of medium
Adjust to pH 8.0 ฑ 0.1 with NaOH or HC1.
Store excess medium in the dark at approximately 4 ฐC until use.
modified from 1995 ASTM vol. 11.05, sectionE 1218, p.581-2
68
-------
4.5 HATCHING BRINE SHRIMP AND THEIR USE AS TEST ORGANISM FOOD
TESTING FACILITY: SPAWAR SYSTEMS CENTER
BIOASSAY LABORATORY (RM 116)
CODE 71750
53475 STROTHE RD.
BLDG. 111
SAN DIEGO, CA 92152
I. OBJECTIVE: Brine shrimp (Artemia spp) are the preferred and most convenient food for Mysids
(Americamysis bahia) and Topsmelt (Atherinops affinis) for whole effluent toxicity testing and
holding/acclimation.
II NECESSARY MATERIALS AND SUPPLIES
Separatory Funnels - (2), 2-Liter capacity
Air pump
Plastic tubing - to provide aeration in separatory funnels
Glass Pasteur pipettes
Flashlight
Dark Material - to aid in collection of brine shrimp
Brine Shrimp (Artemia) cysts
Note: EPA suggests use of Brazilian or Colombian brine shrimp cysts. These can be
purchased from Aquarium Products, 180L Penrod Ct, Glen Burnie, MD 21061. Other
suppliers are on p. 28 of EPA/600/R-95/136.
Ill METHODS
1. Add 1 L of seawater to a 2-L separatory funnel, or equivalent.
2. Add 10 mL or 1-2 grams of Artemia cysts to the separatory funnel and aerate for 24 hours at 27
ฐC. Actual hatching time will vary with temperature and strain.
3. After 24 hours, remove the air supply from the separatory funnel. Cover funnel with a dark cloth
or paper towel while directing the beam of a flashlight through the bottom of the funnel for 5-10
minutes. Artemia are phototactic, and will concentrate at the bottom of the funnel. Do not leave
concentrated nauplii at bottom for more than 10 minutes without aeration, or they will die.
4. Drain the nauplii into a funnel fitted with a <150 jam Nitex or stainless steel screen, and gently
rinse with seawater.
5. Gently spray nauplii into a beaker and fill until desired concentration is reached.
6. Approximately 40-50 nauplii per feeding per test organism is targeted for most tests. In order to
feed 10 organisms, this requires 200 \i\ of a suspension with a density of 2000 nauplii/ml. This
concentration can be achieved by dilution or concentration of nauplii following cell counts under
a light microscope. For test protocols using 5 organisms per beaker, 100 jol of the suspension
would be used.
69
-------
4.6 HYPERSALINE BRINE AND ARTIFICIAL SEA SALT USE
I OBJECTIVE
Since many effluents entering marine and estuarine systems have little measurable salinity, salinity
adjustment may be necessary for tests with marine/estuarine organisms. It is important to maintain
an essentially constant salinity across all treatments. Two methods are available to adjust salinity -
artificial sea salts and hypersaline brine. Some test methods (e.g. embryo tests, QwikLite) may
require use of HSB due to toxicity associated with artificial salting.
II. MAKING HYPERSALINE BRINE:
A. Collect seawater on an incoming tide and pour through a 10 jam filter.
B. Store 4 L of filtered seawater in a carboy that has a bottom valve.
C. Freeze for approximately 6 hours at -10 ฐC to -20 ฐC.
D. Remove hypersaline water from container, leaving behind ice (primarily freshwater).
E. Check salinity and pH, adjust if necessary (salinity should never exceed 100 ppt).
F. Filter through a 1 jam filter.
G. Cap, label, date and store in the dark at 4 ฐC.
III. DILUTIONS WITH HYPERSALINE BRINE (SEE BRINE DILUTION WORKSHEET):
Several dilutions of effluent are needed in a defmitve test. The highest test concentration
will include a combination of effluent and hypersaline brine. The concentration of the
highest test concentration will depend on how much brine is required. If the target salinity
is 34 ppt, diluting to make different test concentrations must be done with dilution water
that is also 34ppt. Use the following equation to determine the volume of brine to be added
to effluent.
VB = VE x (34 - SE) / (SB - 34), where
VB = volume of brine to be added in ml
VE = volume of effluent to be added in ml
SE = salinity of the effluent (ppt)
SB = salinity of the brine (ppt)
+ Dilution water (34 ppt)
x^ ^s
6.25%
tl
12.5%
x^ ^s
25%
70
-------
PROTOCOL FOR HYPERSALINE BRINE, BRINE CONTROLS AND ARTIFICIAL SALT Cont'd
For example, if the brine is 68 ppt (SB) and the effluent is 2 ppt (SE), to 1 L effluent,
you would add 1000 ml x (34-2) / (68-34) = 941.18mL brine to make a 34 ppt effluent
solution (51.5% effluent).
Serial dilution with dilution water (baseline water) can then be used to achieve other
effluent concentrations (i.e. 6.25%, 12.5%, 25%, 50%).
*Check pH of all solutions, and adjust appropriately by adding dropwise, dilute hydrochloric acid
or sodium hydroxide.
IV. BRINE CONTROLS
Brine controls should contain the quantity of brine used in the highest effluent concentration. First,
D.I. water should be adjusted to the salinity of effluent using dilution water (34 ppt) therefore the
same amount of brine can be added to the control as the effluent. The amount of reagent water (D.I.
water + dilution water) (VE) added to the brine controls can be determined by the following
equation:
VE = VB x (SB-34) / (34-SE)
V. ARTIFICIAL SALT
A. For every Ippt increase in salinity desired, add Ig/L of artificial salt (Crystal Sea Marine Mix)
directly to effluent. Underestimation is good practice, so that the sample does not get over-
salted.
B. Dissolve salt by use of magnetic stirrers.
C. If undissolved salt remains, decant effluent into another flask, leaving behind the particulates.
D. The pH of the effluent may be a little different from natural seawater, but it is generally not
adjusted.
71
-------
4.7 REFERENCE TOXICANT TEST DILUTIONS
I. OBJECTIVE
Reference toxicant tests provide an indication of the sensitivity of the test
organisms and the performance of the testing laboratory. A dilution factor of 0.5 or greater is
generally used. Below are concentrations generally used for various tests used by the Bioassay Lab
and general procedures for preparing test dilutions.
Species
Atherinops qffinis
Menidia
beryllina
Americamysis
bahia
Mytilus edulis
Crassostrea gigas
Strongylocentrotus
purpuratus
Dendraster
excentricus
Ceratocorys
horrida
Eohaustorius
estuarius
Rhepoxynius
abronius
Toxicant
CuS04
CuS04
CuS04
CuS04
CuS04
CuS04
CuS04
CuS04
CdCl2
CdCl2
Test
Endpoint
Survival:
LC50
Survival :
LC50
Survival:
LC50
Normal shell
development
EC50
Normal shell
development
EC50
Normal larval
development
EC 50
Normal larval
development
EC 50
Photon
emission:
EC50
Survival/
reburial
Survival/
reburial
Concentrations
(ug/L, ppb)
0, 50, 100, 200, 400
0, 50, 100, 200, 400
0, 25, 50, 100, 200,
400
0,4.1,5.9,8.4, 12,
17.2, 24
0,4.1,5.9,8.4, 12,
17.2, 24
0, 5.8, 8.4, 12, 17.2,
24,35
0,4.1,8.4, 12, 17.2,
24,35
0, 15.6,31.3,62.5,
125,250
Test
Duration
96 h
96 h
96 h
48 h
48 h
72 h
72 h
24 h
96 h
96 h
II MAKING REFERENCE TOXICANT STOCK SOLUTIONS
A 1 ppt Cu solution is made on an annual basis (or as needed) and stored in the KM 116
refrigerator. The solution is made as follows (other stock solutions are made similarly, with the
appropriate weight of solid material substituted for the ones shown here):
A. Obtain reagent grade CuSO4ป5H2O crystals from chemical storage area in RM 116.
B. Weigh out 0.982g CuSO4ป5H2O on Sartorius balance in Rm 115.
C. Add to 250 ml E-pure (deionized) water in clean polycarbonate bottle.
72
-------
PROTOCOL FOR REFERENCE TOXICANT DILUTIONS (Cont'd)
D. Label bottle with estimated concentration (e.g. 1 ppt), date, and analyst initials.
E. Have solution analyzed by STGFAA.
F. Label the bottle with the measured concentration and date, and record on log sheet.
III. MAKING SUB-STOCK FOR USE IN DILUTIONS
A. The day of the test, make up 200 mL of 1 ppm (or other relevant concentration) Cu stock
solution by pipetting 0.2 mL of the Ippt stock in 199.8 mL filtered seawater. This volume is
adequate for most types of testing.
B. Store at testing temperature until use.
IV. MAKING TEST DILUTIONS
A. Construct a table or use log sheet with pre-constructed table similar to the one below
Coll
Col 2
Col 3
Col 4
Col 5
Concentration
(ppb)
Control
15.63
31.25
62.5
125
250
mL 1 ppm Cu
stock in seawater
0
0.78
1.56
3.13
6.25
12.5
mL filtered
seawater
(diluent)
48
47.22
46.44
44.87
41.75
35.5
mL
dinoflagellate
culture
2
2
2
2
2
2
Total mL
50
50
50
50
50
50
Where,
Column 1 is determined by the specific test endpoint and species.
Column 2 is determined by the equation: CYVi= C2V2
Example: (Ippm =1000 ppb) x(Vi) = (15.625 ppb) x (50 ml), Vi= 0.78ml
where: Ci= concentration of stock solution (Ippm)
Vi= unknown volume of stock to be added
C2= desired concentration in dilution flask (e.g. 15.625 ppb)
V2= volume of dilution flask (e.g. 50 ml)
Column 3 is determined by subtracting ml of Cu stock and ml of culture added.
Example: Col 3 = Col 5- (Col 4 + Col 2)
Column 4 is determined by concentration of culture needed for specific test (e.g.
QwikLite).
Column 5 is determined by how many replicates are in each treatment. Excess should be
made so water chemistry can easily be measured.
73
-------
Example: if each treatment has 3 replicates each containing 20ml total, at least 110 ml of
solution should be made. 3 replicates x 20 ml= 60 ml + 50 ml for water quality
measurements.
B. After dilutions have been made, cover with parafilm.
C. Wait 1-2 hours for equilibration before exposure to test organisms.
74
-------
4.8 ACQUISITION, REDUCTION, AND REPORTING OF DATA
I. MANUAL DATA REDUCTION
A. Precisely measure and record all readings and output.
B. Calculate final results using select suitable formulas and programs, (e.g. unionized
ammonia or proper statistical tests).
C. Manually enter at least one sample calculation onto data sheet or notebook.
D. Double check recorded data when transferred into forms or spreadsheets.
E. Compare raw data entries with summaries and results to assure accurate initial data entry.
All raw data must be retained as a part of the study records. These records must be identified
with the following information: date; sample ID; analyst or operator; species identification,
and instrument operating conditions (if applicable). Raw data is stored in a filing system
maintained in the Bioassay Laboratory.
II. COMPUTER DATA REDUCTION
A. Ascertain that all data used in final calculations are entered accurately: mortality, number
normal, number alive, water quality reporting, etc.
B. Record appropriate and accurate information concerning sample identification, date;
sample ID; analyst or operator; species identification, and instrument operating conditions
(if applicable).
C. Identify analysis in the "Test ID Log" notebook and assign a test number that can be cross-
referenced.
D. Calculate results using appropriate computer software and analyses.
E. Manually enter at least one sample calculation onto data sheet or notebook.
F. Properly interpret the computer output.
G. Attach all relevant test material (raw data, summaries, analyses, and reports) and place in
appropriate binder or filing system.
75
-------
4.9 RECORDING AND HANDLING DATA
I. OBJECTIVE: To provide guidelines on recording data in notebooks, forms and any other
media to ensure legibility, accuracy, validity and clarity.
II GUIDELINES
A. All entries should be made legible.
B. All entries should be made with a black or blue ballpoint pen.
C. Use initials or name to indicate the originator of entries.
D. All blank cells with no data should contain a short slash or horizontal dash.
E. Abbreviations should not be used unless they are for chemical names (i.e. NaCl for
Sodium Chloride).
F. Cross out errors with a single line and note initials.
Ill NOTETAKING
A. Notes should be recorded in a laboratory notebook. Include date, person(s)
responsible, project name, and signatures.
B. A generic note page can be found on the laptop in room 116 at: C:\Documents and
Settings\zacharia\Desktop\Laboratory 116 titled "Notepage".
C. Fill in the top of the page where there is space for the date (month day and year)
and the notetaker's name.
D. Record any observations such as experimental procedure, equipment, materials and
calculations.
E. Attach note page with all other relevant test data and file into a binder or folder
with corresponding project.
IV. RECORDING DATA
Standard units are used among organizations to ensure consistency. When appropriate, the
mean and standard deviation should be reported.
pH pH units
Salinity ppt or %o
Temperature ฐ C
76
-------
Dissolved Oxygenmg/L
Ammonia % unionized NH3
Sulfide H2S mg/L
V DATA MANAGEMENT
A. The analyst shall internally review data by checking for completeness and
accuracy. The analyst will verify:
1. Analyses are within the calibration curve range
2. QC samples meet acceptance criteria
3. Data meets quality objectives
4. Calculations are performed correctly
B. When entering data into an electronic format, analyst shall use a hardcopy to
compare with entries or use a double entry technique.
C. Data entered should be backed up as frequently as needed.
D. Any data that is analyzed with a computer program such as Toxcalc 5.0 or
Microsoft Excel should be verified with randomly chosen hand calculations.
Provide calculations on original sheet and initial.
VI HANDLING SUSPECT AND ERRONEOUS DATA
A. If suspect data is identified during review, it should be examined further.
B. Document investigation of suspect data.
C. If necessary, report erroneous data to laboratory director for corrective action.
Please refer to the document titled "Corrective Action" which can be found at: C:\Documents and
Settings\zacharia\Desktop\Laboratory 116\Protocols and logs\QA Manual Documents
77
-------
4.10 STATISTICAL ANALYSIS OF DATA
I. OBJECTIVE: To statistically analyze data for determination of NOEC/LOECs via hypothesis
tests and/or LCSOs using point estimation techniques.
II. METHODS
ACUTE TOXICITY ANALYSIS
A. Fill out data tables using data sheets specific to test method.
B. Enter data into ToxCalc 5.0 - found in the Windows XP Programs Menu.
C. ToxCalc automatically runs Shapiro-Wilk's test for normality and Bartlett's test for
equality of variance. If data is not normally distributed, perform an arc-sin square
root transformation.
D. Run Hypothesis test function in ToxCalc
Determining which Hypothesis test to use:
1. Equal # of reps & data is normal - Dunnet's Multiple Comparison test
2. Equal reps & data in non-normal - Steel's Many -One Rank test (only if there
are at least 4 replicates per treatment).
3. Unequal reps & data is normal - T-test with a Bonferroni Adjustment
4. Unequal replicates & data is non-normal - Wilcoxon Rank Sum test
E. Results of a hypothesis test are expressed in terms of the No-Observed-Effect
Concentration (NOEC) and the Lowest-Observed-Effect Concentration (LOEC).
F. Use the Maximum likelihood probit for the point estimation. If data do not fit this
method, use the Trimmed Spearman-Karber method. Linear Interpolation is used if
neither of the former methods can be performed based on the test data. Results of
the point estimate techniques are expressed as EC, 1C, or LC values.
G. Verify that all data was entered into database correctly and save.
H. Print spreadsheets with data output and graphs for future reference.
78
-------
CHRONIC TOXICITY ANALYSIS
SURVIVAL ENDPOINT
A. Fill out data tables using data sheets specific to test method.
B. Calculate proportion surviving each day.
C. Toxcalc will automatically run Shapiro-Wilk's test for normality and Bartlett's test for
equality of variance on data. If data is not normally distributed, perform an arc-sin square
root transformation.
D. Run Hypothesis test function in ToxCalc
Determining which Hypothesis test to use:
1. Equal # of reps & data is normal - Dunnet's Multiple Comparison test
2. Equal reps & data in non-normal - Steel's Many -One Rank test (only if
there are at least 4 replicates per treatment).
3. Unequal reps & data is normal - T-test with a Bonferroni Adjustment
4. Unequal reps & data is non-normal - Wilcoxon Rank Sum test
E. Results of a hypothesis test are expressed in terms of the No-Observed-Effect Concentration
(NOEC) and the Lowest-Observed-Effect Concentration (LOEC).
F. Use the Maximum likelihood probit for the point estimation. If data do not fit this method,
use the Trimmed Spearman-Karber method. Linear Interpolation is used if neither of the
former methods can be performed based on the test data. Results of the point estimate
techniques are expressed as EC, 1C, or LC values.
G. Verify that all data was entered into database correctly and save.
H. Print spreadsheets with data output and graphs for future reference.
GROWTH ENDPOINT
A. Follow the same procedures as used from survival data.
B. Concentrations with 100% mortality and concentrations with significant mortality are not
included in growth analysis.
C. Graph the mean growth values for each concentration with ranges.
D. Summarize any other information indicating toxicity.
79
-------
4.11 HAZARDOUS MATERIAL STORAGE, DISPOSAL AND SAFETY INFORMATION
I. OBJECTIVE: This document provides guidelines for the lifecycle management of hazardous
materials (HM) and hazardous wastes at the Space and Naval Warfare Systems Center San
Diego (SSC-SD).
What is a hazardous material?
Any material that, because of its quantity, concentration, physical or chemical characteristics,
poses a present or potential health hazard to human health and safety or to the environment1.
How to identify a hazardous material:
Look on the label of the original container; if the material is hazardous it will usually indicate
this. If there are any uncertainties refer to the Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) located in
room 116.
II. PURCHASING HAZARDOUS MATERIALS
A. Please refer to the Hazardous Materials Information notebook located in room 116 for
specific purchasing instructions.
B. When any new chemicals are received (either hazardous or non-hazardous) notify the
Safety office at X3-3 873.
Ill STORAGE AND MANAGEMENT OF HAZARDOUS MATERIALS
A. LABELING OF HAZARDOUS MATERIAL
All hazardous material must be labeled with:
Original Containers
1. Chemical name(s) or common name(s)
2. Manufacturer's name and address
3. Chemical hazards (flammable, corrosive, etc.)
4. HSMS barcode label (contact Safety office if missing)
Secondary Containers
1. Chemical name or common name
2. Manufacturer's name and address
3. Chemical hazards (flammable, corrosive, etc.)
4. Date that the container was filled
5. Name of the owner of the HM
B. Periodically inspect HM to ensure that there aren't any leaks and labels are intact.
C. Give useable HM that is no longer needed to the HazMin Center, Bldg. 116, for reissue.
80
-------
In addition, all hazardous materials must have a MSDS on site where they are stored (electronic
access is acceptable). MSDS's in room 116 are kept in a black notebook located near the fume
hood in the southeast corner of the room. Please refer to the hazardous materials information
notebook located in room 116 for MSDS explanations.
IV. HANDLING HAZARDOUS MATERIALS
A. CATEGORIES OF HAZARDS
1. Flammables
These are substances that have a flash point (The lowest temperature at which the
vapor of a combustible liquid can be made to ignite momentarily in air) below 100 ฐF.
a. most liquids volatile, generating flammable vapors
b. vapors are irritating or toxic
c. skin or eye contact can be irritating
examples: hexane, benzene, methanol, acetone, most paints, propane
2. Halogenated Solvents
Solvents containing a halogen such as chlorine, fluorine, bromine, or iodine
a. non-flammable
b. volatile
c. vapors are irritating or toxic
d. skin or eye contact can cause burns
examples: trichloromethane, carbon tetrafluroide
Organic solvent management - concentrated wastes (essentially pure or as water
mixtures that have flashpoints below 140 ฐF) must not be discharged into the
sewer, these include alcohols, ketones, and solvents immiscible with water.
3. Corrosives
Acidic or caustic materials that can cause irreversible alterations to human skin tissue
a. Generally liquid, but may be granular or powdered solids
b. skin or eye contact can cause severe burns
c. skin contact with hydrofluoric acid may be fatal
d. vapors irritating to eyes, skin and mucous membranes and are generally toxic
examples: nitric acid, acetic acid, ammonia, potassium hydroxide
4. Toxics
Lethal dose higher than limits designated by OSHA
a. May be solid, liquid or gas
b. May exhibit flammability or corrosivity
examples: heavy metals (cadmium, lead, mercury), toluene, oils and greases,
adhesives, detergents, paints
81
-------
5. Compressed Gases
Gases stored at pressures above one atmosphere (1 atm)
a. May be toxic (chlorine, ammonia)
b. May be flammable (propane, oxygen)
c. May be inert (nitrogen, argon, helium)
d. May be cryogenic (liquid nitrogen)
6. Oxidizers
Materials that readily contribute oxygen to a reaction or combustion
a. Unstable and reactive
b. May be flammable
c. Are corrosive
d. May be explosive
e. skin or eye contact can cause burns
f. fumes from reaction, decomposition or fire may be toxic and cause irritation to
skin and eyes.
examples: hydrogen peroxide, benzoyl peroxide, t-butyl peracetate
7. Water Reactives
Materials that react violently when exposed to water
a. Can react with moisture in air
b. Can react with oxygen containing liquids such as alcohols and ketones
c. Difficult to extinguish if ignited
d. May be explosive
examples: lithium, sodium, sodium hydroxide, magnesium nitride, calcium carbide,
nitric acid
8. Pyrophorics
Materials that spontaneously combust with exposure to air
a. May be liquid or powder
b. May have violent reactions
c. Skin contact may cause burns
d. Fumes from fire or reaction may be irritating or toxic
e. Extinguished fire may re-ignite
examples: diethyl zinc, trimethyl aluminum, elemental phosphorus
9. Explosives
Materials that release a tremendous amount of energy in the form of heat, light, and
expanding pressure in a very short period of time
a. May be sensitive to shock or heat
b. Many are flammable
c. Explosions can produce projectiles or pressure shock waves
examples: TNT, picric acid, nitroglycerine, ammonium nitrate
82
-------
B. PROTECTION FROM HAZARDS
1. Eliminate the possibility of exposure through material substitution
2. Use engineering controls, such as fume hoods, to eliminate exposure
3. Use personal protective equipment (gloves, goggles and aprons)
V. HAZARDOUS WASTE DISPOSAL
Hazardous waste is any discarded, excess or spilled material that is solid, liquid or gas and
meets the definition of a hazardous material1. It is either Characteristic (toxic, reactive,
ignitable or corrosive) or Listed (appears on a specific EPA or state list).
The following are prohibited sewer discharges:
- Flammable or explosive substances - flashpoint < 140 ฐF
- Corrosives - pH <5.0 or > 12.5
Hazardous Wastes
- Trucked pollutants (from offsite)
Substances that may obstruct flow (solid or viscous)
Odorous wastes
Uncontaminated ground, storm and surface water
- Sludge
- Heated wastestreams >150 ฐF
Radioactive wastes
- Greases and oils (that will cause interference or pass through treatment system to ocean)
A batch discharge request may be made to discharge small and large quantities of wastewater
by contacting Brett Radsliff (code 20384) at X3-1437.
A. DETERMINE IF WASTE IS HAZARDOUS
1. If waste needs to be analyzed, contact Mary Anne Flanagan at X3-6363.
B. DISPOSAL
1. Schedule a pick up by calling X3-7464 as soon as possible after generation.
a. Complete all paperwork prior to pickup
- HW Disposal Request Form (Required for all HW)
- HW Profile Sheet (not req'd for materials in original containers)
-CopyofMSDS's
b. Forms available in Hazardous Materials Information notebook or are
accessible on line at:
https://iweb.spawar.navy.mil/services/sti/publications/inst/forms/
2. If you need to accumulate HW
83
-------
a. Contact Mary Anne Flanagan at X3-6363, so she can visit work site and
determine which type of accumulation you require.
b. She will complete an accumulation area designation form.
c. Two methods of HW accumulation;
i. Satellite Accumulation (accumulate for no longer than 9 months, 55
gallon limit, under control of designated operator)
ii. Standard Hazardous Waste Accumulation (accumulate for no longer
than 45 days, no volume restriction, under the control of code's
representative)
d. Both methods require analyst to fill out a HW label and affix to containers
e. When ready to turn in HW, call X3-7464 and complete all paperwork prior
to pickup:
i. HW Disposal Request Form (Required for all HW)
ii. HW Profile Sheet (not required for materials in original containers)
iii. Copy ofMSDS's
f. Forms available in Hazardous Materials Information notebook or are
accessible on line at:
i. https://iweb.spawar.navy.mil/services/sti/publications/inst/forms/
g. If Disposal Containers are needed contact Louie Don or Rudie at X3-7464.
3. OTHER HW DISPOSAL METHODS
h. Fluorescent light tubes - call the HW Office, X3-7464, and they will pick
them up.
i. Printer toner cartridges recycling - Bldg. 116 A-33 Wing 6, Ground Floor.
Each cartridge must be in original box and re-sealed.
j. Batteries - from pagers, phones, flashlights, clocks, etc. are collected in a
bucket located in Bldg. Ill, 2nd floor, northeast corner.
k. Glass - If broken, dispose of in a broken glass container, to obtain more
glass disposal boxes, call Joel Baumbaugh at X3-5030.
VI. HAZARDOUS MATERIALS SPILLS
A. If material spill is unknown, a large spill, a danger to personnel, or too large to contain or
clean up
1. evacuate the area
2. report to X9-911 (Federal Fire Department) and X3-5024
B. If spill is safe and type of spill is known
1. Contain the spill using proper protective equipment and spill kit material
2. Identify hazards through use of the MSDS
3. Absorb the spill with appropriate spill pads or absorbent material
4. Bag and Tag spill and material used
5. Call X3-5024 for disposal coordination
Report all spills to the Safety and Environmental Office X3-5024.
1 Protocol derived from SSC-SD Document 4110.1
84
-------
4.12 COUNTING SPERM WITH A HEMOCYTOMETER
Preparation
1. Mix sperm by agitating the tube with a vortexer. Add about 0.025 ml of sperm to a 100 ml beaker
containing 50 ml of 15 ฐC dilution water and stir with a Pasteur pipette. Cover and keep at 15 ฐC,
use within 1.5 hours.
2. Slowly withdraw a subsample of semen (i.e. 0.5 ml), dispense it into a 1% glacial acetic acid
solution (killing solution) in an Erlenmeyer flask (i.e. 5 ml of 10% acetic acid in 45 ml of filtered
seawater). Rinse residual semen from pipet several times by filling and emptying into flask. Cover
flask with parafilm and mix thoroughly by repeated inversion. *(0.5 ml of semen in 50 ml of 1%
acetic acid is a 100-fold dilution (50 / .05 = 100)).
3. Transfer well-mixed acetic acid/sperm samples to a hemocytometer and wait 15
minutes to settle before counting.
Cell Counting
(Adapted from: http://www.ruf.rice.edu/~bioslabs/methods/microscopy/cellcounting.html)
A device used for cell counting is called a counting chamber. The most widely used type of chamber is
called a hemocytometer, since it was originally designed for performing blood cell counts.
To prepare the counting chamber the mirror-like polished surface is carefully cleaned with lens paper. The
coverslip is also cleaned. Coverslips for counting chambers are specially made and are thicker than those
for conventional microscopy, since they must be heavy enough to overcome the surface tension of a drop of
liquid. The coverslip is placed over the counting surface prior to putting on the cell suspension. The
suspension is introduced into one of the V-shaped wells with a pasteur or other type of pipet. The area
under the coverslip fills by capillary action. Enough liquid should be introduced so that the mirrored
surface is just covered. The charged counting chamber is then placed on the microscope stage and the
counting grid is brought into focus at low power.
85
-------
PROTOCOL FOR COUNTING SPERM WITH A HEMOCYTOMETER cont'd
I ! I
(I-
I
Illllllllllllllllllll
illinium
Illllllllllllllllllll
Illllllllllllllllllll
illinium
i
One entire grid on standard hemocytometers with Neubauer rulings can be seen at 40x (4x objective). The
main divisions separate the grid into 9 large squares (like a tic-tac-toe grid). Each square has a surface area
of one square mm, and the depth of the chamber is 0.1 mm. Thus the entire counting grid lies under a
volume of 0.9 mm-cubed.
Cell suspensions should be dilute enough so that the cells do not overlap each other on the grid, and should
be uniformly distributed. To perform the count, determine the magnification needed to recognize the
desired cell type. Now systematically count the cells in selected squares so that the total count is 100 cells
or so (number of cells needed for a statistically significant count). For large cells this may mean counting
the four large corner squares and the middle one. For a dense suspension of small cells you may wish to
count the cells in the four 1/25 sq. mm corners plus the middle square in the central square. Always decide
on a specific counting pattern to avoid bias. For cells that overlap a ruling, count a cell as "in" if it overlaps
the top or right ruling, and "out" if it overlaps the bottom or left ruling.
To get the final count in cells/ml, first divide the total count by 0.1 (chamber depth) then divide the result
by the total surface area counted. For example if you counted 125 cells in each of the four large corner
squares plus the middle, divide 125 by 0.1, then divide the result by 5 mm-squared, which is the total area
counted (each large square is 1 mm-squared). 125/ 0.1 = 1250.
86
-------
PROTOCOL FOR COUNTING SPERM WITH A HEMOCYTOMETER cont'd
1250/5 = 250 cells/mm-cubed. There are 1000 mm-cubed per ml, so you calculate 250,000 cells/ml.
Sometimes you will need to dilute a cell suspension to get the cell density low enough for counting. In that
case you will need to multiply your final count by the dilution factor.
Using the equation on the egg and sperm count sheet, determine concentration of sperm. Using either table
5 in EPA manual or C1V1=C2V2, determine volume of concentrated sperm stock needed to make a 500:1
solution.
87
-------
4.13 COUNTING MUSSEL/OYSTER LARVAE USING AN INVERTED MICROSCOPE
TESTING FACILITY: SPAWAR SYSTEMS CENTER
BIOASSAY LABORATORY (RM 116)
CODE 71750
53475 STROTHE RD.
BLDG. 111
SAN DIEGO, CA 92152
I. OBJECTIVE: This method allows for estimation of the chronic toxicity of effluent and receiving
waters to the embryos and larvae of bivalve mollusks. After larvae have been exposed to test
solutions for the specified amount of time they should be preserved in 1.0 mL of 37%
(concentrated) buffered formalin so that each sample has a final formalin concentration of 4%.
Larvae should ideally be examined within one week of preservation.
II NECESSARY MATERIALS AND SUPPLIES
Inverted microscope - for inspecting gametes and counting embryos and larvae (Located in
room 152, Bldg. Ill)
Counter, two unit, 0-999 - for recording counts of embryos and larvae
Data record sheets
III METHODS
A. Turn on microscope and adjust lamp to reasonable brightness.
B. Ensure that the magnification is set to 40X (4x objective and lOx oculars).
C. Carefully unscrew cap and place vial on the center of the mechanical stage. If vial has
been shaken at all, contents must be allowed to settle before counting.
D. Using the mechanical stage, begin at the upper left corner of one end of the vial and rotate
the stage so that the field of view moves downward as you count all larvae, scoring them as
normal or abnormal. When you've come to the bottom edge of the vial, focus on an
embryo or particle that lies at the edge of the field of view and move stage so that the
particle has moved from one end to the other (i.e. right to left), bringing in view only
larvae that have not been counted. Count that field of view, and repeat this procedure until
the entire vial has been counted.
E. Use the fine focus to view larvae that may be at different depths near the bottom of the
vial. This is particularly important around the edges of the vial, where objects can appear
distorted. It is important to count all larvae in the vials, so take time ensuring that this is
done correctly.
IV DISTINGUISHING BETWEEN NORMAL AND ABNORMAL LARVAE
A. Larvae that were live before preservation with completely developed D-hinged shells
should be marked as normal. Larvae that appear slightly deformed, but have achieved the
-------
PROTOCOL FOR ASSESSING MUSSEL/OYSTER LARVAE USING AN INVERTED MICROSCOPE
(Mytilus galloprovincialis or Crassostrea gigas) Cont'd
D-hinge stage should still be counted as normal unless they are not clearly D-shaped. If
the shells are empty, they are considered dead and this should be noted as abnormal.
B. Mortality will be assessed by comparing the number of normal and abnormal larvae in the
test vials with a set of initial embryo vials that were preserved at the beginning of the test.
89
-------
5.0 LOGS AND DATA SHEETS
5.1 ECHINODERM EMBRYO-LARVAL DEVELOPMENT TEST - WATER QUALITY DATA
WATER QUALITY DATA - 96 Hour Echinoderm Embryo Development Test
Marine Chronic Bioassay
Project:
Sample ID:
Test No.:
Concentration
%
Salinity
(PPt)
0
24
48
Technician Initials: WQ Readings:
Dilutions made by:
Animal Source/Date Received:
Comments: 0 hrs:
72
96
Test Species:
Start Date/Time:
End Date/Time:
Temperature
PC)
0
24
48
0 24 48 72 96
72
96
Water Quality Measurements
S. purpuratus
Dissolved Oxygen
(mg/L)
0
24
48
72
96
PH
(pH units)
0
24
48
72
96
24hrs:
48 hrs:
72 hrs:
QC Check:
Final Review:
90
-------
5.2 BIVALVE EMBRYO-LARVAL DEVELOPMENT TEST - WATER QUALITY DATA
WATER QUALITY DATA - 48 Hour Bivalve Embryo Development Test
Marine Chronic Bioassay
Project:
Sample ID:
Test No.:
Concentration
(%)
Lab Control
Brine Control
6.25
12.5
25
50
Salinity
(PPt)
0
24
Technician Initials: WQ Readings:
Dilutions made by:
48
Temperature
(ฐC)
0
24
0 24 48
48
Water Quality Measurements
Test Species:
Start Date/Time:
End Date/Time:
Dissolved Oxygen
(mg/L)
0
24
48
PH
(pH units)
0
24
48
Animal Source/Date Received:
Comments: 0 hrs:
24 hrs:
48 hrs:
QC Check:
Final Review:
91
-------
5.3 EMBRYO-LARVAL DEVELOPMENT TEST CALCULATIONS
Embryo-Larval Development Test - SPAWNING CHECKLIST & CALCULATIONS
Batch ID: Spawn/Test Date: Test Species
Analyst:
Task
Spawning Inducement Initiated
Spawning Begins
Females/Males Isolated in Incubator
Fertilization Initiated
Fertilzation Terminated/eggs rinsed
Embryo Counts
Embryo addition to vials
Time
Embryo Counts:
Embryo Stock #1:
Embryo Stock #2:
Embryo Stock #3:
Mean =
Mean =
Mean =
uL* 1000uL/mL =
uL* 1000uL/mL =
uL* 1000uL/mL =
Adjust selected embryo stock to 2000 embryos/ml. Confirm density:
Selected Stock: , , Mean = / uL * lOOOuL/mL =
Add 100 |il of 2000 embryo/ml stock to obtain 20 embryos/ml in test vials.
Notes:
cells/mL
cells/mL
cells/mL
cells/mL
92
-------
5.4 EMBRYO-LARVAE DEVELOPMENT TEST RESULTS RAW DATA SHEET
Embryo L
Project:
Sample ID:
Test No.:
.arval Bioassay
Random #
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
QC Check:
Number Counted
Test Species:
Start Date:
End Date:
Number Normal
Final Review:
96-Hour Development
Technician Initials
93
-------
Embryo L
Project:
Sample ID:
.arval Bioassay
Random #
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
QC Check:
Number Normal
Test Species:
Start Date:
End Date:
Number Abnormal
Technician Initials
Final Review:
48-hour Development
5.5 DINOFLAGELLATE PMT COUNT SHEET FOR COPPER REFERENCE TOXICANT
TEST
94
-------
Qwiklite (Sealite) Data for Ceratocorys horrida - Copper Reference Toxicant Test
TEST ID:
Backround noise
Mean:
Control -
Mean:
Cone.
Cone.
Mean:
Cone.
Oppb
25 ppb
50 ppb
Cone.
Rep
1
2
3
4
PMT count
Rep
1
2
3
4
5
PMT count
Mean:
Cone.
Rep
1
2
3
4
5
PMT count
Mean:
Mean:
Cone.
Mean:
Rep
1
2
3
4
5
PMT count
5.
Rep
1
2
3
4
5
M&bNOFJ
PMT count
LAGELLAfE PMT COUNT SHEET
DATE:
TOXCALC TEST ID:'
100 ppb
Rep
1
2
3
4
5
PMT count
200 ppb
Rep
1
2
3
4
5
PMT count
400 ppb
Rep
1
2
3
4
5
PMT count
95
-------
Qwiklite (Sealite) Data for Ceratocorys horrida
DATE:
TEST ID:
Backround noise
Rep
1
2
3
4
PMT count
Mean:
Control -
Rep
1
2
3
4
5
PMT count
Mean:
Cone/Sample ID:
Rep
1
2
3
4
5
PMT count
Mean:
Cone/Sample ID:
Rep
1
2
3
4
5
PMT count
Mean:
Cone/Sample ID:
Rep
1
2
3
4
5
PMT count
Mean:
U.C TEST ID:
Cone/Sample ID:
Rep
1
2
3
4
Mean:
PMT count
Cone/Sample ID:
Rep
1
2
3
4
5
Mean:
PMT count
Cone/Sample ID:
Rep
1
2
3
4
5
Mean:
PMT count
Cone/Sample ID:
Rep
1
2
3
4
5
Mean:
PMT count
Cone/Sample ID:
Rep
1
2
3
4
5
PMT count
Mean:
DINOFLAGELLATE PMT COUNT ANALYSIS
96
-------
SPAWAR - C. horrida 24 hour exposure test
Date
Cone. (%)
0
15.625
31.25
62.5
125
250
PMT Counts
Mean PMT Counts
#DIV/0!
#DIV/0!
#DIV/0!
#DIV/0!
#DIV/0!
#DIV/0!
SD
#DIV/0!
#DIV/0!
#DIV/0!
#DIV/0!
#DIV/0!
#DIV/0!
CV (%)
#DIV/0!
#DIV/0!
#DIV/0!
#DIV/0!
#DIV/0!
#DIV/0!
% control
100
#DIV/0!
#DIV/0!
#DIV/0!
#DIV/0!
#DIV/0!
Normalized
SD
#DIV/0!
#DIV/0!
#DIV/0!
#DIV/0!
#DIV/0!
#DIV/0!
97
-------
5.7 NEANTHES 28 DAY WATER CHEMISTRY DATA SHEET
28-Day Marine Sediment Bioassay
Static-Renewal Conditions
Client:
Sample ID:
Test Day
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
Salinity
(PPt)
Temperature
(ฐC)
Dissolved
Oxygen (mg/L)
PH
(units)
Water Quality Measurements
Test Species:
Start Date/Time:
End Date/Time:
Fed
Water
Change
Technician
Initials
Comments
QC Check: Final Review:
98
-------
5.8 NEANTHES SURVIVAL DATA SHEET
Marine Sediment Bioassay
Client:
Project ID:
Organism Survival
Test Species: N. arenaceodentata
Start Date/Time:
End Date/Time:
Sample ID
Initial No.
No.
Recovered
Pan
Weight
(mg)
Pan + Org.
Weight
(mg)
WET
Pan + Org.
Weight
(mg)
DRY
Technician
Initials
QC Check:
Final Review:
99
-------
-------
5.9 AMPHIPOD 10 DAY WATER CHEMISTRY DATA SHEET
10-Day Marine Sediment Bioassay
Static Conditions
Water Quality Measurements
Client:
Sample ID:
Test Species: E. estuarius
Start Date/Time:
End Date/Time:
Test Day
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Salinity
(PPt)
Temperature
(ฐC)
Dissolved
Oxygen (mg/L)
PH
(units)
Technician
Initials
Comments
QC Check:
Final Review:
101
-------
5.10 AMPHIPOD SURVIVAL DATA SHEET
Marine Sediment Bioassay
Organism Survival
Client:
Project ID:
Sample ID
Initial No.
Test Species:
Start Date/Time:
End Date/Time:
No.
Recovered
Technician
Initials
E. estuarius
QC Check:
Final Review:
102
-------
5.11 ACUTE FISH/MYSID SURVIVAL SHEET
ACUTE FISH / MYSID SURVIVAL AND WATER QUALITY
DATA
Marine Acute Bioassay
Static-Renewal Conditions
Project:
Sample ID:
Test No.:
Concentration
PPb
Lab Control
50
100
200
400
800
Initial Counts
QC'd by:
Re
P
A
B
C
D
A
B
C
D
A
B
C
D
A
B
C
D
A
B
C
D
A
B
C
D
A
B
C
D
Number of Live
Organisms
0
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
24
48
72
96
Test Species:
Start Date/Time:
End Date/Time:
Salinity
(PPซ)
0
24
48
1
f
1
f
1
f
1
f
1
f
'
f
'
f
Animal Source/Date Received:
72
96
Water Qi
STes
Counts:
Readings:
Dilutions made by:
Temperature
0
24
Age at Initiation:
48
1
f
1
f
1
f
1
f
1
f
'
f
'
f
72
96
Dissolved Oxygen
mg/L)
0
24
48
1
f
1
f
1
f
1
f
1
f
'
f
'
f
Comments: i = initial reading in fresh test solution, f = fina reading in test chamber priorto renewal
QC Check:
Organisms fed priorto initiation, circle one ( y / n)
Tests aerated? Circle one ( y / n) if yes, sample ID(s): Duration:
Aeration source:
Fin
72
96
AM:
PM:
al Review:
jality Measurements
t Organism Survival
Tech Initials
0
24
48
72
96
0
24
PH
units)
48
1
f
1
f
1
f
1
f
1
f
'
f
'
f
72
96
Feeding Times
0
24
48
72
96
- 103 -
-------
5.12 DINOFLAGELLATE MAINTENANCE LOG
Dinoflagellate Maintenance Log
Date
Media
ID
Salinity
(ppt)
pH
Temp
(ฐC)
Date of
next
media
split
Date of Culture Being Split
(check mark indicates that culture has
been split at that date)
Q L. polyedrum
Q C. horrida
Q P. noctiluca
Q G. gridleyii
Q P. lunula
Q P. fusiformis
Q L. polyedrum
Q C. horrida
Q P. noctiluca
Q G. gridleyii
Q P. lunula
Q P. fusiformis
Q L. polyedrum
Q C. horrida
Q P. noctiluca
Q G. gridleyii
Q P. lunula
Q P. fusiformis
Q L. polyedrum
Q C. horrida
Q P. noctiluca
Q G. gridleyii
Q P. lunula
Q P. fusiformis
Q L. polyedrum
Q C. horrida
Q P. noctiluca
Q G. gridleyii
Q P. lunula
Q P. fusiformis
Q L. polyedrum
Q C. horrida
Q P. noctiluca
Q G. gridleyii
Q P. lunula
Q P. fusiformis
Q L. polyedrum
Q C. horrida
Q P. noctiluca
Q G. gridleyii
Q P. lunula
Q P. fusiformis
Normal
Temp, and
Light
Regime?
(18ฐC-12h
light/12h dark)
a Yes
a No
a Yes
a No
a Yes
a No
a Yes
a No
a Yes
a No
a Yes
a No
a Yes
a No
- 104-
-------
5.13 Brine Dilution Worksheet
Marine Chronic Bioassay
Project:
Sample ID:
Brine Dilution Worksheet
Salinity of Effluent
Salinity of Brine
Target Salinity
Test Dilution Volume
Salinity Adjustment Factor:
(TS-SE)/(SB-TS) =
TS = target salinity
SE = salinity of effluent
SB = salinity of brine
Effluent
QC Check:
Analyst:
Test Date:
Test Type:
Date of Brine used:
Alkalinity of Brine Control:
Brine Control
Dl Volume
Brine Control
0.0
Total Brine Volume Required (ml): I
0.0
Final Review:
mg/Las CaCOS
Concentration
%
Control
6.25
12.5
25
50
Effluent
Volume
(ml)
NA
12.5
25.0
50.0
100.0
Salinity
Adjustment
Factor
NA
Brine
Volume
(ml)
NA
Dilute
to:
(ml)
200
200
200
200
200
200
200
- 105-
-------
Brine Dilution Worksheet Summary
STEP 1: Calculate the Effluent Salinity Adjustment Factor
Salinity Adjustment Factor:
TS-SE TS = target salinity
SB - TS SE = salinity of effluent
SB = salinity of brine
Ex: 34-10
71 -34
24 = 0.65
37
Concentration %
Control
6.25
12.5
25
50
61*
Effluent
Volume
(mL)
NA
31.3
62.5
125
250
303
Salinity
Adjustment
NA
0.65
0.65
0.65
0.65
0.65
Brine
Volume
(mL)
NA
20.3
40.6
81.2
162.5
197
Dilute to
to:
(mL)
500
500
500
500
500
500
Dl Volume
Brine Control
214
0.92
197
500
STEP 2: Calculate Effluent Volumes
Multiply 500 by each cone, in decimal form
Ex: 500x0.0625 = 31.3
STEP 3: Calculate Brine Volumes
Multiply the effluent volumes by the
salinity adjustment
Ex: 31.3x0.65 = 20.3
STEP 4: Determine the Highest
Obtainable Test Concentration *
Divide 500 by 1 + the salinity adjustment
Ex: 500/1.65 = 303
Then divide 303 by 500 to determine a %
303/500 = 61%
STEP 5: Calculate the Brine Control Salinity Adjustment Factor
Brine Control Calculation: TS - 0 Ex: 34 - 0 = 0.92
SB-TS
71 -34
STEP 6: Calculate the Dl Volume Required for the Brine Control
Divide the highest brine volume from above by the brine control salinity adjustment factor
Ex:
197
0.92
= 214
- 106-
-------
6.0 REFERENCES
ASTM 2000. Annual Book of ASTM Standards. Vol. 11.05. American Society for Testing and
Materials. 2000.
EPA 1994. Methods for Assessing the Toxicity of Sediment-associated Contaminants with
Estuarine and Marine Amphipods. EPA 600/R-94/025. June 1994
EPA 1995. Short-Term Methods for Estimating the Chronic Toxicity of Effluents and Receiving
Waters to Marine and Estuarine Organisms. First edition. EPA/600/R-95/136. August 1995.
EPA 1993. Methods for Measuring the Acute Toxicity of Effluents and Receiving Waters to
Freshwater and Marine Organisms. Fourth Edition. EPA/600/4-90/027F. August 1993.
EPA 2002. Methods for Measuring the Acute Toxicity of Effluents and Receiving Waters to
Freshwater and Marine Organisms. Fifth Edition. EPA/82l/R-02/012. October 2002.
Tidepool Scientific 2002. Toxcalc User's Guide. Version 5.0. Tidepool Scientific Software.
McKinleyville, CA, USA.
- 107-
-------
SFWAR
Systems Center
PACIFIC
Bioassay Laboratory
Quality Assurance Manual
Version V
May 11, 2011
Approvals:
Laboratory Director
Gunther Rosen
Date:
Code 71750 Branch Head
D. Bart Chadwick
Date:
53475 Strothe Road
Bldg. Ill Room 116
San Diego, CA 92152-5000
(619)553-0886 (619)553-2766
-------
Table of Contents
Section Page
INTRODUCTION 4
1.0 LABORATORY ORGANIZATION & PERSONNEL RESPONSIBILITIES 5
1.1 LABORATORY ORGANIZATION 5
1.2 PERSONNEL RESPONSIBILITIES 5
1.3 EXPERTISE AND PROFICIENCY 6
2.0 FACILITIES AND EQUIPMENT 8
2.1 FACILITIES 8
2.2 EQUIPMENT 11
3.0 QUALITY ASSURANCE OBJECTIVES 12
3.1 QA/QC AND TOXICITY DEFINITIONS* 12
3.2 DATA ACCURACY, PRECISION, COMPLETENESS, REPRESENTATIVENESS,
AND COMPARABILITY 16
4.0 SAMPLE AND TEST ORGANISM HANDLING 18
4.1 RECEIVING SAMPLES 18
4.2 HOLDING SAMPLES 19
4.3 SAMPLE HANDLING AND CHAIN OF CUSTODY 19
4.4 ORGANISM AND SAMPLE LOG 22
4.5 SAMPLE COLLECTION RECORD LOG 23
4.6 RECEIVING/HOLDING TEST ORGANISMS 24
5.0 HAZARDOUS MATERIAL (HM) STORAGE, DISPOSAL AND SAFETY
CONSIDERATIONS 25
5.1 PURCHASING HAZARDOUS MATERIALS 25
5.2 STORAGE AND MANAGEMENT OF HAZARDOUS MATERIALS 25
5.3 HANDLING HAZARDOUS MATERIALS (SAFETY) 25
5.4 HAZARDOUS WASTE DISPOSAL 25
5.5 HAZARDOUS MATERIALS SPILLS 26
6.0 CALIBRATION, USE, AND TROUBLESHOOTING OF
INSTRUMENTATION 27
6.1 CALIBRATION OF BASIC LABORATORY INSTRUMENTATION 27
6.2 LABORATORY STANDARDS 28
7.0 CLEANING GLASSWARE/PLASTICWARE 29
8.0 QUALITY CONTROL SAMPLES 30
8.1 NEGATIVE CONTROLS 30
8.2 REFERENCE TOXICANT TESTS 30
9.0 PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES FOR LABORATORY
EQUIPMENT AND CHEMICALS 31
9.1 PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE FOR EQUIPMENT 31
9.2 PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE FOR CHEMICALS 35
-------
10.0 ACQUISITION, REDUCTION AND REPORTING OF DATA 36
10.1 ACQUISITION 36
10.2 DATA REDUCTION AND REPORTING 36
11.0 REPLICATION AND TEST SENSITIVITY 37
12.0 CORRECTIVE ACTION 38
12.1 DETERMINING THE PROBLEM 38
12.2 RESOLUTION 39
13.0 AUDITS AND QUALITY ASSURANCE REPORTS 40
13.1 INTERNAL AUDITS 40
13.2 EXTERNAL AUDITS 40
13.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE REPORTS 40
REFERENCES 41
-------
INTRODUCTION
Space and Naval Warfare Systems Center Pacific (SSC Pacific) is responsible for
development of the technology to collect, transmit, process, display and, most critically,
manage information essential to U.S. Navy operations. The mission of the
Environmental Sciences and Applied Systems Branch (Code 71750) at SSC Pacific is to
provide cost effective technology for Navy environmental compliance and restoration
through ecological risk assessment and restoration research, sediment characterization
and management technology development, and environmental sensor and instrument
development. The use of both standardized and innovative bioassays for evaluating
effluents, receiving water, sediments, and other environmental samples have been a
critical component to research within the branch for a number of years. The potential for
toxicity data generated by the Bioassay Laboratory to be used in modification of Navy
discharge permits as well as uses towards other regulatory issues led to the effort to
obtain certification by the state of California's Environmental Laboratory Accreditation
Program (ELAP) and by the State of Washington Department of Ecology.
Code 71750 consists of approximately 40 personnel, and is made up of biologists,
chemists, oceanographers, and engineers, two-thirds of which have advanced degrees
with a general emphasis in environmental science. Typically, a small number of the staff
are directly involved in studies requiring toxicity testing, and the Bioassay Laboratory
itself is generally run by two to three people, the laboratory director and one to two
analysts, due to the relatively small scale of the projects being conducted. The Bioassay
Laboratory at SSC-Pacific is not a production laboratory, yet is dedicated to producing
results of the highest quality.
This manual presents the Bioassay Laboratory's quality assurance plan. It includes
laboratory procedures with emphasis on Quality Assurance/Quality Control (QA/QC)
requirements based on EPA guidelines for aquatic bioassays, specifically whole effluent
toxicity (WET) testing as intended for compliance with National Pollution Discharge
Elimination System (NPDES) permits. This manual is intended for Bioassay Lab staff
and any other relevant parties interested in understanding the laboratory's approach to
quality assurance.
-------
1.0 LABORATORY ORGANIZATION & PERSONNEL RESPONSIBILITIES
1.1 LABORATORY ORGANIZATION
TESTING FACILITY: SSC PACIFIC
BIO ASS AY LABORATORY (RM 116), CODE 71750
53475 STROTHE RD.
BLDG. 111
SAN DIEGO, CA 92152
Space and Naval Warfare Systems Center Pacific (SSC-Pacific) is responsible for
development of the technology to collect, transmit, process, display and, most critically,
manage information essential to U.S. Navy operations. The mission of the
Environmental Sciences and Applied Systems Branch (Code 71750) at SSC-Pacific is to
provide cost effective technology for Navy environmental compliance and restoration
through ecological risk assessment and restoration research, sediment characterization
and management technology development, and environmental sensor and instrument
development. The use of both standardized and innovative bioassays for evaluating
effluents, receiving water, sediments, and other environmental samples have been a
critical component to research within the branch for a number of years. The potential for
use of toxicity data generated by the Bioassay Laboratory to modify Navy discharge
permits and make other regulatory changes led to application for certification by the state
of California's Environmental Laboratory Accreditation Program (ELAP) and by the
State of Washington Department of Ecology.
Code 71750 consists of approximately 40 personnel, and is made up of biologists,
chemists, oceanographers, and engineers, two-thirds of which have advanced degrees
with a general emphasis in environmental science. Typically, a small number of the staff
are directly involved in studies requiring toxicity testing. The Bioassay Laboratory is
typically operated by two to three people, and includes the laboratory director and one or
two analysts. When needed, assistance in the lab is provided by other branch members.
The Bioassay Laboratory at SSC-Pacific is not a production laboratory, and projects are
generally manageable without additional support.
1.2 PERSONNEL RESPONSIBILITIES
The Bioassay Lab staff is responsible for conducting acute and/or chronic toxicity testing
as well as sample handling, and laboratory equipment calibration and maintenance. The
work performed by this group consists of acquisition, management, analysis,
interpretation and presentation of toxicological data. The group utilizes several tools to
manage, analyze, and present data (Toxcalc 5.0, SigmaPlot, SigmaStat, Microsoft Excel,
Microsoft Word, and Microsoft PowerPoint). These analyses are reported to the
appropriate principal investigator or to the project sponsor.
There is considerable overlap with respect to individual responsibilities within the
toxicology group. There are two primary positions, however, including the
-------
laboratory/technical director and one or two analysts. Additional support is provided by
other members of Code 71750 where needed. The roles of these positions are briefly
described below:
A) Laboratory/Technical Director
Responsibilities of this position are overseeing laboratory operations,
establishing quality assurance and quality control (QA/QC) policies and
enforcing them, conducting toxicity testing and data analysis, verifying the
quality of the data and taking corrective action when needed, interfacing with
other scientists and project sponsors, attending project-related meetings, report
writing, and presentation of project results. For this position, an advanced
degree in the biological sciences and several years of related experience is
preferred.
B) Analyst
An analyst is responsible for sample handling, preparation, and disposal, test
organism maintenance, carrying out toxicity testing, data analysis, record
keeping, calibration and troubleshooting of instruments, inventory, and general
implementation of QA/QC policy. This position requires at least a bachelor's
degree in biological or related sciences and at least one year of related
experience.
C) Additional Branch Support
There are several other scientists in the branch with extensive capabilities that
assist in one way or another with the functioning of the Bioassay Lab (e.g.
sampling or sample handling, chemical analysis of reference toxicant stock
solutions, assistance with larger scale testing, etc.).
1.3 EXPERTISE AND PROFICIENCY
To ensure a high level of professionalism, the staff is expected to be at the forefront of
scientific research in their respective field. All scientists in code 71750 have a minimum
of a bachelor's degree, while approximately 67% have advanced degrees (e.g. M.S.,
Ph.D.). A number of resources for professional development are also available at SSC-
Pacific. Employees may access SSC-Pacific's Marine Environmental Support Office
(MESO) in Bldg. Ill for a large collection of technical reports and scientific journals.
SSC-Pacific also has a technical library located at Topside in building 81 and the research
library at Scripps Institution of Oceanography is nearby. Subscriptions to journals in the
areas of toxicology and marine biology/chemistry, memberships to professional
associations, internet links to scientific journals, are other avenues for increasing
technical knowledge. Employees are also encouraged to attend and present at seminars
and departmental and division meetings to extend communication and promote
-------
interdepartmental organization. Career development via additional training/certification
programs is encouraged. General training in laboratory safety and hazardous materials
handling, storage and disposal are provided to the staff via seminars and training
conducted at SSC-Pacific.
Division Head
Code 717
Advanced Systems & Applied Sciences
Martin Machniak
Branch Head
Code 71 750
Environmental Sciences & Applied Systems
D. Bart Chadwhick
_____^^ L J 1
Scientist, YF-II
(Oceanographer)
Charles Katz
Scientist, YD-II
(Analytical Chemist)
Ignacio Rivera
Scientist, YD-II
(Bioassay Laboratory Director)
Gunther Rosen
Scientist, YD-II
(Chemist)
Ernest Arias
Biologist
(Analyst)
Marienne A Colvin
Scientist, DP-MI
(Analyst/Chemist)
Joel Guerrero
Organizational chart for the Bioassay Lab and relevant additional staff at SSC-Pacific.
-------
2.0 FACILITIES AND EQUIPMENT
2.1 FACILITIES
The Bioassay Laboratory is located on the first floor of Bldg. 111 at the Bayside location
of SSC-Pacific's Point Loma campus, just north of the Submarine Base. Bldg. Ill is a
combination of office, laboratory, and storage space with a net working space of 35,662
sq. ft. The first floor is primarily dedicated to laboratories.
The main Bioassay Lab is located in Room 116, but a number of other labs are also
utilized. A temperature controlled lab space is located across the hall in Room 124.
Flow-through experiments can be conducted in the Rm 124 (also known as the "cold
room") as it is plumbed to receive clean seawater from north San Diego Bay. The cold
room also receives clean compressed air and has fluorescent lighting wired to a timer.
Additional equipment, storage, and sample processing space can be found in the
following locations (see map of Bldg. 111 on following page): 115 (counter space,
balances), 127 (autoclave), 244 (E-pure water), and 246 (centrifuge).
Bldg. Ill was built in 1982 and was originally designed to facilitate naval research in
marine sciences. All labs, therefore, were plumbed to receive natural seawater, deionized
water, and compressed air. Natural seawater is pumped from Pier 160, located near the
mouth of San Diego Bay, and passes through two sand filters before it is stored in a
settling tank on the top of the building. From there, it is distributed to individual
laboratories. Reagent water is provided by a water purification system that includes
carbon filtration, water softener, reversed osmosis cartridge prefilters, and a UV-sterilizer
to produce deionized water with a resistivity of > 15 megohms/cm. Where required,
reagent water with a resistivity of > 18 megohms/cm is available from the Barnstead E-
pure System located in Rm 244. Compressed air is dehydrated before distribution to labs,
and is subsequently filtered in the Bioassay Lab and cold room with a 5-|im in-line filter
to remove potential particulates, oil, or residual moisture.
Adjacent to Bldg. Ill, there are three research piers bordering north San Diego Bay. Pier
169 is home to the RV/ECOS, the branch's 40-foot survey boat that is used to collect
many of the samples used for bioassays. The vessel is part of the branch's Marine
Environmental Survey Capability (MESC), which is houses an elaborate flow through
system used to obtain a variety of water quality parameters in real-time. A 22-foot
whaler is also available for use, and is launched from the boat ramp located near Pier 160.
Pier 160 is a concrete pier that supports various other SSC-Pacific research vessels (e.g.
Acoustic Explorer, USS Dolphin). Pier 159 is primarily dedicated to the Navy's Marine
Mammal Program.
-------
Schematics of Bldg. Ill
First floor (top figure), second floor (bottom figure). Blue shaded rooms represent those
housing equipment or space used by the bioassay laboratory.
M ^ '
ซ?! i4s 147 j
L I F"l
120
119
118
tr
117
Lab
Sediment
Lab
115
^\
5 rrf pj L_
| I ,55 4^. D
Lapota iซ- ii = kj
ฃ IdLM r^
Cold
Room
JL j
H
107
IstRoor
212 10,
2511 2S2 I 253 I 254 I 255 I 2ป I 257
_l_Li_LLlJr
?i! ^
; r : (__ _.
: A | D ; -cjoj; E i ^
I : i j.^^^_^ซ< i ' j Jr
on
I:
A | & I C D E I 276
| 274
J K L I 273
~r;i ;n M"
J_
IT
*la2
[aaa
266
n J A 1 ฐ
bซ2l 1
C
a
j
;
H
K
=-
\
L
^
D r*r
1 1 268 1
208 1 I 1 1
hi204! H 1 1
N__
225
227
S
" r ^ i
224 |
22, F
1329
I
230 |
|
<"
234
232
q7 F G M i .
2nd Floor
-------
ฃtf, r' f <* *4f
EkLit^ ..^ - - -
B
Aerial photo of SSC-Pacific Bay side.
Aerial photo of piers at SSC-Pacific Bayside.
10
-------
2.2 EQUIPMENT
A list of major equipment used by the Bioassay Lab is below:
Description
Incubators (2, temp/light
controlled)
Incubator (temp/light
controlled)
Light Microscope
Inverted Microscope
Spectrophotometer
UV/VIS Spectrophotometer
Ion Selective Electrode
(Ammonia)
Conductivity Meter
Dissolved Oxygen Meter
pH Meter
Drying Oven
Ultracentrifuge
Ice Maker
E-Pure Water Purification
System
Analytical Balance
Analytical Balance
Fume Hood
Microtox Toxicity
Analyzer
Fluorometer
Dinoflagellate Toxicity
Analyzer
Microwave
Light Tables (2)
Magnetic stirrers/hot plates
(10)
Make/Model
Percival Scientific, Model 1-3 5LL VL
Percival Scientific, Model 136LL
Olympus/CH-2
Olympus
HACH/DR2400
ThermoSpectronic/Genesys 10UV
Orion/720A
Orion/1 05+
Orion/840
Accumet/50
Yamato Gravity Convection Oven,
Model DX-600
Beckman/L8-80M
Scotsman
Barnstead 18 megohm-cm
Mettler PE22 top-loading, 0.1 g
Sartorius, 0.1 mg
Labconco
Microtox/2055
Turner/112
QwikLite
Daewoo
Porta-Trace/1618
Corning
Location
(Rm.)
116
116
116
116
116
114
116
116
116
116
116
246
246
244
115
115
All labs
123
116
152
116
116
116
11
-------
Refrigerator
Whirlpool Estate TT18TKXSQ
116
3.0 QUALITY ASSURANCE OBJECTIVES
The purpose of the SSC-Pacific Bioassay Laboratory Quality Assurance Program is to
ensure that the lab provides high-quality data for principal investigators, project sponsors,
and other clients. The laboratory aspires to adhere to the following objectives:
Data should be accurate in terms of agreement with reference "true" values (for
water quality parameters only)
Data should agree among individual measurements made under similar conditions
Data should be complete in terms of the amount of valid data achieved vs.
planned
Data should be comparable to prior relevant data for evaluation and testing
purposes
Data should be representative of the overall population of database of parameter
measurements
Data should be reproducible under similar conditions at any site
These objectives are achieved by ensuring that all staff members participate in the
QA/QC program, which covers all phases of the data generation, including strict
compliance with SOPs for sample handling, equipment calibration and proper use, record
keeping, and data handling.
3.1 QA/QC AND TOXICITYDEFINITIONS*
Accuracy- The degree of agreement of an analytical result with the true (reference)
value. Accuracy is affected by both random and systematic errors, but is sometimes used
improperly to denote only systematic error (see "Bias" below). Because "true" values
don't necessarily apply to toxicity testing, this term is not typically applied.
Batch- A set of consecutive determinations (analyses) made without interruption; a
"run". Results are usually calculated from the same calibration curve or factor.
Bias- That part of inaccuracy of analytical results caused by systematic error.
Blank- An analysis made by the same procedure as a sample, but intended not to contain
the analyte.
12
-------
Calibration- Standardization of a measurement or instrument by use of another standard
or instrument to adjust any variance in accuracy. The concentrations of the calibration
standards should bracket the expected concentration of the test materials.
Calibration Curve- The graphical relationship between the known values, such as
concentrations, of a series of calibration standards and their instrument response.
Calibration Standard- A substance or reference material used to calibrate an instrument.
Certified Reference Material (CRM)- A reference material one or more of whose
property values are certified by a technically valid procedure, accompanied by or
traceable to a certificate or other documentation which is issued by a certifying body.
Chain of Custody (COC) Form- Record that documents the possession of the samples
from the time of collection to receipt in the laboratory. The record generally includes:
number and types of containers; mode of collection; collector; time of collection;
preservation (if any); and requested analyses.
Coefficient of Variation (CV)- A standard statistical measure of the relative variation of
a distribution or set of data, defined as the standard deviation divided by the mean. It is
also called the relative standard deviation (RSD). The CV can be used as a measure of the
precision within and between laboratories, or among replicates for each treatment
concentration (EPA, 2000).
Control Chart- A cumulative summary chart of results from QA tests with reference
materials (e.g. reference toxicants). The results of a given QA test are compared to the
control chart mean value and acceptance limits (typically 95% confidence limits, i.e.
mean + 2 standard deviations) or warning limits (typically 99% confidence limits, i.e.
mean + 3 standard deviations).
Corrective Action- The action taken to eliminate the causes of an existing
nonconformity, defect, or other undesirable situation in order to prevent recurrence.
Data Quality Objectives (DQOs)- A statement of the overall level of uncertainty that a
decision maker is willing to accept in results derived from environmental data. This is
qualitatively distinct from quality measurements such as precision, bias, and detection
limit.
Data Validation- The process of evaluating the available data against the project DQOs
to determine to what degree the objectives were met.
Detection Limit- The lowest concentration or amount of the target analyte that can be
identified, measured, and reported with confidence that the analyte concentration is not a
false positive value.
13
-------
Effect Concentration (EC)- A point estimate of the toxicant concentration that would
cause an observable adverse effect (e.g., death, immobilization, or serious incapacitation)
in a given percent of the test organisms, calculated from a continuous model (e.g., Probit
Model). EC25 is a point estimate of the toxicant concentration that would cause an
observable adverse effect in 25 percent of the organisms (EPA, 2000).
False negative- A determination that a material is nontoxic when it is in fact toxic.
False positive- A determination of toxicity when the material is in fact nontoxic.
Holding Times- The maximum times that samples may be held prior to analysis and still
be considered valid or not compromised.
Hypothesis Testing- A statistical technique (e.g. Dunnett's test) for determining whether
a tested concentration is statistically different from the control. Endpoints determined
from hypothesis testing are NOEC and LOEC. The two hypotheses commonly tested in
WET are: Null Hypothesis (Ho)- The effluent is not toxic. Alternate hypothesis (Ha)- The
effluent is toxic (EPA, 2000).
Inhibition Concentration (1C)- A point estimate of the toxicant concentration that
would cause a given percent reduction in a non-lethal biological measurement (e.g.,
reproduction or growth), calculated from a continuous model (e.g., Interpolation
Method). IC25 is a point estimate of the toxicant concentration that would cause a 25-
percent reduction in a non-lethal biological measurement (EPA, 2000).
LC50 (lethal concentration, 50 percent)- The toxicant or effluent concentration that
would cause death in 50% of the test organisms (EPA, 2000). The concentration is
calculated from the data set using statistical or graphical models. The lower the LC50, the
more toxic the chemical or effluent sample. Other LC values, e.g. the LC90 or LC5 may
also be calculated to determine concentrations causing more or less mortality to the
population. Note: The LC value must always be associated with the duration of exposure.
Thus a 48-h LC50, 96-h LC50, etc. is calculated.
LOEC (Lowest-observed-effect-concentration)- The lowest concentration of an
effluent or toxicant that results in adverse effects on the test organisms (i.e., where the
values for the observed endpoints are statistically different from the control) (EPA,
2000).
Negative Control- A negative control is a part of an experiment where the experimental
conditions are identical to the regular experiment except the substance being tested in not
present.
NOEC (No-observed-effect-concentration)- The highest concentration of an effluent or
toxicant that causes no observable adverse effects on the test organisms (i.e., the highest
concentration of toxicant at which the values for the observed responses are not
statistically different from the control) (EPA, 2000).
14
-------
NPDES (National Pollutant Discharge Elimination System)- Created under the Clean
Water Act. The permitting system under which point source discharges are regulated to
eliminate or minimize the discharge of toxicants into surface waters. States frequently
oversee their own programs which must comply with (i.e. be equally or more stringent)
the national permit program.
Precision- 1) A qualitative term used to denote the scatter of results. Precision is said to
improve as the scatter among results becomes smaller. Precision is usually measured as
standard deviation (SD), coefficient of variation (CV), or relative percent difference
(RPD). 2) A measure of the reproducibility within a data set. Precision can be measured
both within a laboratory and between laboratories using the same test method and
toxicant (EPA, 2000).
Quality Assurance (QA)- An integrated system of activities involving planning, quality
control, quality assessment, reporting and quality improvement to ensure that a product or
service meets defined standards of quality with a stated level of confidence.
Quality Control (QC)- The overall system of technical activities whose purpose is to
measure and control the quality of a product or service so that it meets the need of users.
Reagent Water- Water suitable for use in making up critical reagents or for use in
sensitive analytical procedures.
Reference Toxicant Test- Reference toxicants are routinely tested to demonstrate the
continuing ability of the laboratory to successfully perform the tests and to evaluate the
overall health and sensitivity of the test organisms over time. The coefficient of variation
(CV) for the test LCSOs (acute tests) or IC25s (chronic tests) provides a measure of test
repeatability or precision; the lower the CV value, the less variable the results and the
lower the frequency of false positive and false negative results. Individual reference test
results are compared to control charts to determine acceptability.
Replicate- Each of several experimental units that are tested simultaneously using the
same experimental conditions (ASTM, 2002).
Standard Curve- A plot of concentration of known analyte standards versus the
instrument response to the analyte.
Toxicity Test- A procedure to determine the toxicity of a chemical or an effluent using
living organisms. A toxicity test measures the degree of effect of a specific chemical or
effluent on exposed test organisms (EPA, 2000).
*Unless otherwise noted, definitions were taken from EPA SW-846 Revision 1, July
1992 and Washington Department of Ecology Model Quality Assurance Model
http ://www. epa. gov/epaoswer/hazwaste/test/pdfs/chap 1 .pdf.
15
-------
3.2 DATA ACCURACY, PRECISION, COMPLETENESS,
REPRESENTATIVENESS, AND COMPARABILITY
1) Precision
Toxicity test precision is determined by comparison of a) the variation among
laboratory replicates of individual samples, and b) reference toxicant tests.
Depending on the study objectives and the test method, replication will vary.
Typically, three to five replicates are analyzed for each sample/test concentration.
Standard deviations or CVs can be compared with results from other studies to
estimate specific test precision. Reference toxicant tests are useful because they can
both verify the technical quality of the testing facility as well as the sensitivity of the
test organisms. Because toxicity of reference toxicants is assumed to be constant,
their use is a good indicator of precision. Resulting LCSOs are plotted on control
charts indicating current and past performance. If test results fall within 2 standard
deviations of the running mean, the test is generally considered acceptable.
Calculated CVs of the LC50 should also not exceed the 75th percentile of CVs
reported nationally as reported in EPA (2000). See Section 8.2 for more information
on the use of reference toxicants.
2) Accuracy
Because there is no "true" or "correct" response against which to compare toxicity
test results, accuracy cannot be determined. Therefore, data quality objectives to test
accuracy of toxicity tests are not available. Water quality measurements, however,
are assessed for accuracy by comparing measured values of standards against known
values. If they differ by more than 10% for dissolved oxygen, pH, or salinity, or by
more than 30% for ammonia, corrective action will be taken.
3) Completeness
It is anticipated that all samples received will be tested. There are several factors that
may affect the successful completion of testing including: a) acceptable negative
control response; b) acceptable reference toxicant (positive control) tests; c)
acceptable test condition variability; and d) test organism availability. For these
reasons, it is important that enough sample volume be collected in case retesting is
necessary. A test failure rate of approximately 20% is estimated, but with retesting a
completeness rate of 95% is expected. Sample holding time may become an issue in
the case of retesting, and needs to be considered by the project planner.
4) Representativeness
A number of factors determine the degree to which toxicity tests represent actual
effects of typical effluent discharges. These include sampling design, sample
16
-------
handling, test species and endpoint used, and exposure time. Careful consideration of
how samples and what kinds of samples (e.g. grab vs. composite) are collected,
therefore, is important.
5) Comparability
The use of standardized testing allows for comparability among laboratories. The use
of negative controls and reference toxicant tests can be used to compare test results
with other studies. Splits of samples can also be used to compare the Bioassay Lab's
performance with other laboratories. Comparability should take into account
variables such as species, test conditions (e.g. pH, temperature, salinity, dissolved
oxygen), dilution factor, test endpoint, reference toxicant, and dilution water
characteristics.
17
-------
4.0 SAMPLE AND TEST ORGANISM HANDLING
4.1 RECEIVING SAMPLES
1) Upon arrival, samples should be handled with the utmost care. Samples should be
received in a well-ventilated area in case leakage has occurred during shipping.
2) A chain of custody form should be completed and a copy given to the person who
delivered the sample. The chain of custody form should contain the following
information:
Sample ID
Sample description/quantity
Date received
Date collected
Sample collector
Location of delivery
Analyses requirements for each sample
Date and signatures of the delivery person and receiver
3) The sample should be logged in and given an identification number. The number
given should be the next consecutive number on the list for SSC-Pacific Sample IDs. The
following information should also be recorded in the logbook:
Time/date that the sample was collected.
Time/date that the sample was received.
Temperature of sample during collection and upon arrival at lab.
Company or organization the sample came from.
Type of analyses that will be performed on the sample.
Description of sample (volume, type [seawater, freshwater, sediment], preserved
or frozen, compounds known or suspected to contain).
Initials of the person who received the sample.
18
-------
Location sample was stored upon arrival.
4) Dilution or laboratory water such as Scripps Institution of Oceanography (SIO)
seawater is collected at the Scripps pier in La Jolla, California by a laboratory technician.
Dilution or laboratory water is logged into the "Seawater Collection Log" upon arrival
and is stored in a clean carboy or a suitable HOPE container for a maximum of 14 days.
4.2 HOLDING SAMPLES
If samples are not immediately prepared for testing, they are stored at a target
temperature of 4 ฐC in the cold room (Bldg.l 11, Rm. 124) until used. Temperature of the
cold room is logged daily during sample holding and should at no time fall outside the
range of 0-6 ฐC (USEPA 2002). Every effort should be made to initiate testing with
effluent sample on the arrival day, and effluent sample-holding time should not exceed
36h. Sediment samples must be tested within 14 days.
4.3 SAMPLE HANDLING AND CHAIN OF CUSTODY
I. OBJECTIVE: Methods for tracing and transfer of samples ensure the integrity
from time of collection to sample disposal. Custody of samples is defined as
either having physical possession, being in a person's view after taking
possession, security from tampering or holding in a place restricted to
authorized personnel.
II METHODS
A. Transferring Custody
1. Records shall be kept in permanent ink on a chain of custody form for
receiving samples.
2. Chain of custody forms should always travel with test organisms or
samples.
3. Upon arrival of samples, examine containers to detect any damage or
tampering.
4. If containers are damaged, it should be noted on the chain of custody
form.
5. Note the date and time on the form and sign.
B. Subdividing Samples
19
-------
If samples need to be sub-divided and sent to other laboratories, this should be
noted on the original chain of custody form and a new chain of custody form
should be made.
C. Sample Disposal
Indicate disposal of samples, which terminates the chain of custody.
Copies of chain of custody forms shall be kept in the laboratory or with all corresponding
project data.
20
-------
SfVUfflR
Systems Center
PACIFIC
ENVIRONMENTAL SCIENCES AND
APPLIED SYSTEMS BRANCH, CODE 71750
53605 HULL STREET
San Diego, CA 92152-5000
CHAIN OF CUSTODY RECORD
Date
Page
of
Project Title / Project Number:
Remarks / Air
Bill:
Sampler(s): (Signature)
Tel:
Fax:
E-mail:
Special Instructions:
Field Sample
Identification
Sampling
Temp. (ฐC)
Sampling
Date
Relinquished by: (Signature)
Relinquished by: (Signature)
Sampling
Time
Matrix
Project Leader:
Contact:
Contact Tel:
Requested Analyses
Received by: (Signature)
Received by: (Signature)
Date:
Date:
Time:
Time:
21
-------
4.4 ORGANISM ARRIVAL LOG
ORGANISM ARRIVAL LOG
Batch ID
Date
Received
Received
From
Project Title
Species
Age when
shipped
Number
Ordered
Organism Condition
(e.g. number dead)
Initial Water Quality
pH
D.O.
Temp.
Salinity
Storage
Location
Analyst
Initials
Species
A.a. - Atherinops affinis
A.b.- Americamysis bahia
C.g. - Crassostrea gigas
C.h. - Ceratocorys horrida
M.g. - Mytilus galloprovincialis
R.a.- Rhepoxinius abronius
S.p. - Strongylocentrotus purpuratus
E.e. - Eohaustorius esturaius
M.b. - Menidia beryllina
Other:
22
-------
4.5 SAMPLE COLLECTION RECORD
SAMPLE COLLECTION RECORD
SSC Sample ID
(correspond w/Toxcalc ID)
Sample Name
Sampling Date
Begin
End
Sampling Time
Begin
End
Collection
Temp.
Water Quality on Arrival
pH
D.O.
Temp.
sal.
Sample Type
(e.g. Grab/Com p.)
Received By
(print name)
Company or
Organization
Storage
Location
23
-------
4.6 RECEIVING/HOLDING TEST ORGANISMS
With the exception of dinoflagellates, test organisms used by the Bioassay Lab are
generally not cultured on the premises; therefore, they are purchased and shipped or hand
delivered by outside vendors. The fastest method of shipment is always used to prevent
unnecessary stress on the test organisms. Analysts are trained in the proper procedures
for receiving and maintaining test organisms. Notes are recorded for all stages, from
arrival in the lab to termination and disposal of unused organisms. See "Receiving and
Holding Test Organisms" SOP for details. General considerations with respect to
successful maintenance of test organisms are:
Minimum shipping time
Shipped in aerated containers
Immediate assessment of water quality and organism health upon arrival
Preparation and maintenance of high quality food supply
Daily feeding
Acclimation to test conditions at safe rate for species
Regular water changes
Water quality regularly monitored
Organisms are not overcrowded in holding tanks
Minimization of disturbances to prevent stress
Before disposal, any surviving test organisms are humanely killed, generally by
concentrating into a container and freezing. Under no circumstances are test organisms
ever released to the wild or used more than once for testing.
24
-------
5.0 HAZARDOUS MATERIAL (HM) STORAGE, DISPOSAL AND SAFETY
CONSIDERATIONS
A hazardous material (HM) is any material that, because of its quantity, concentration,
physical or chemical characteristics, poses a present or potential health hazard to human
health and safety or to the environment1. Staff members receive an initial hazardous
materials training course as well as annual refresher trainer from SSC-Pacific. It is the
responsibility of the laboratory director and analyst that all hazardous materials are
acquired, handled, stored, and disposed of according to policy detailed in SSC- Pacific
Document 4110.1. A detailed description of the policy is available in the "Hazardous
Material Storage, Disposal and General Information" SOP. A summary is provided
below:
5.1 PURCHASING HAZARDOUS MATERIALS
Purchasing instructions are provided in a handbook located in Rm 116. Upon
receipt of new chemicals, the Safety Office is notified (x33873).
5.2 STORAGE AND MANAGEMENT OF HAZARDOUS MATERIALS
Prior to storage, all HM needs to be labeled with name, manufacturer, hazard,
barcode label, and owner, whether in original or secondary containers. HM is
inspected regularly to ensure absence of leakage and that labels are intact. A
notebook in Rm 116 contains Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) for each
chemical stored in the lab.
5.3 HANDLING HAZARDOUS MATERIALS (SAFETY)
Hazardous materials are grouped into different categories including: flammables,
halogenated solvents, corrosives, toxics, compressed gases, oxidizers, water
reactives, pyrophorics, and explosives. All staff members are trained in the
characteristics of these materials, and the safety considerations associated with
working with these materials. Engineering controls such as fume hoods are used
to eliminate exposure. Personal protective equipment such as gloves, goggles,
respirators, and aprons are also used where necessary. Safety equipment
including first aid kits, fire extinguishers, and eye wash stations are located in
each lab. Emergency showers are also located in designated areas of the building.
5.4 HAZARDOUS WASTE DISPOSAL
Hazardous waste is any discarded, excess or spilled material that is solid, liquid or
gas and meets the definition of a hazardous material1. It is either Characteristic
(toxic, reactive, ignitable or corrosive) or Listed (appears on a specific EPA or
state list). The staff is trained in which wastes are permitted sewer discharges,
and which are not. Questionable waste can be analyzed by contacting the Safety
25
-------
and Environmental Office (x36363). Otherwise, proper labels and paperwork are
filled out (HW Disposal Request Form, HW Profile Sheet, copy of MSDS) and
the code's hazardous waste coordinator is notified so that it can be removed
during the next scheduled pick up date. Forms are available in Hazardous
Materials Information notebook or are accessible on line at:
https://iweb.spawar.navy.mil/services/sti/publications/inst/forms/
5.5 HAZARDOUS MATERIALS SPILLS
All staff is trained in how to respond to FDVI spills. Larger spills deemed a
potential danger to personnel result in area evacuation and a call to the fire
department (9-911). Smaller, known spills are cleaned up using proper protective
equipment and spill kit materials stored in each lab. All spills are reported to the
Safety and Environmental Office (x35024).
26
-------
6.0 CALIBRATION, USE, AND TROUBLESHOOTING OF
INSTRUMENTATION
Calibration refers to the standardization of a measurement or instrument by use of
another standard or instrument to adjust any variance in accuracy. Proper calibration of
equipment prior to sample measurement is the responsibility of the analyst. Calibration
procedures for laboratory instrumentation are covered in the standard operating
procedures (SOPs) manual.
6.1 CALIBRATION OF BASIC LABORATORY INSTRUMENTATION
A) Spectrophotometers
The HACK spectrophotometers are put through a "self-test" each time they are turned on
and generally do not require calibration. However, chemical standards certified by
HACK are used to verify accuracy prior to measurement of samples. If necessary, a
standard curve is constructed to make corrections to samples measurements.
B) Pipettes
Pipettes are routinely checked for accuracy, and calibrated only if necessary. Checking
calibration is performed by repetitively weighing aliquots of distilled water at room
temperature. After weight is converted to volume, the value is compared against
permitted values outlined in the equipment manual. If outside the permitted range,
pipettes are recalibrated with the enclosed service tool and rechecked.
C) Balances
Balances are calibrated by outside specialists on an annual basis. If a balance has been
moved or if standard Class-S calibration weights indicate there is reason to suspect that
the balance is not producing accurate measurements (e.g. values vary by more than 2% of
calibration weight values), this is noted and alternate balances that are calibrated
correctly are used until calibration can be performed.
D) Ion electrodes
Ammonia, conductivity/salinity, pH, and dissolved oxygen electrodes are calibrated each
time they are used, and recalibrated as necessary during sample measurements depending
on the specific method. Refer to the SOP for each piece of equipment for specifics on
their calibration.
E) Thermometers
Thermometers are compared against an NIST certified thermometer on an annual basis.
If temperature readings on thermometers vary by more than 0.5ฐC, a correction factor
may be applied to the thermometer or the thermometer will no longer be used.
27
-------
F) Temperature of cold room, incubators, freezers, lab
Temperature in the main laboratory, cold room, and both incubators are continuously
monitored with max/min thermometers and/or HOBO temperature data loggers. For
storage of samples, cold room temperature is maintained at 4(ฑ 2)ฐC, while freezers are
held at -20(ฑ 10)ฐC. Temperature in incubators is dependent on the test being conducted.
If temperature is outside the range, the thermostat is adjusted accordingly and the
deviation recorded if samples or test organisms are suspected of having been affected.
G) Fume Hood
The fume hoods in all labs are measured annually for adequate air-flow by an industrial
hygienist provided by the Safety Office (POC: Gary Douglas, x35026).
6.2 LABORATORY STANDARDS
Analytical standards used for calibration and preparation of quality control samples shall
be traceable to standard reference materials. Reference toxicant stock solutions are
created from reagent grade chemicals, which are analyzed in-house by stabilized
temperature graphite furnace atomic absorption (STGFAA) spectroscopy by direct
injection. The standard reference material (SRM) CASS4 (coastal seawater) from the
National Research Council of Canada is used to quantify the recovery of any
preconcentration, and SRM 1643d (trace metals in water) of the National Institute of
Standards & Technology is used to evaluate the precision and accuracy of the STGFAA
analysis. These measurements are done by injections in triplicate for each sample, with
relative standard deviation in the absorbance measured of less than 10%. Accuracy better
than 15% is required for the SRM 1643d. An efficiency of + 10% (90% to 110%) in the
recovery of CASS4 is required in the case of samples that are preconcentrated following
the APDC/DDDC liquid/liquid procedure. The limit of detection is determined as three
times the standard deviation of the concentrations measured in blanks. Metal stock
solutions are prepared in E-Pure water and stored in the dark at 4ฐC in polycarbonate
bottles to minimize binding to wall surfaces.
28
-------
7.0 CLEANING GLASSWARE/PLASTICWARE
In general, containers used to hold effluent samples are not reused because they could
carry over adsorbed toxicants from one test to another. Non-disposable sample
containers, test vessels, tanks, and other equipment that comes into contact with effluent
are washed according to EPA protocol (EPA 1993). New plasticware or glassware not
previously used by the lab is first tested to ensure that no toxic effects are associated with
the container. After an absence of toxicity has been established, new plasticware is
rinsed with dilution water prior to its first use, while all new glassware must be soaked in
10% acid and rinsed well with deionized and dilution water prior to its first use. A brief
description of the cleaning procedure used for non-disposable containers after exposure
to effluent is provided below. More details are provided in the SOP Manual.
General cleaning procedures:
1. Rinse with tap water several times.
2. Soak in tap water and 10% Liquinox or other detergent for at least 15 minutes.
3. Rinse in tap water several times.
4. Rinse in 10% Nitric (HNOs) acid to remove scales, metals, and bases.
5. Rinse several times in deionized water.
6. Rinse once with pesticide grade acetone in fume hood.
7. Rinse three times with deionized water.
29
-------
8.0 QUALITY CONTROL SAMPLES
One method for assessment of the quality of bioassay results is the evaluation of
performance for quality control (QC) samples. QC samples used by the Bioassay
Laboratory include negative controls and reference toxicant tests (positive controls).
8.1 NEGATIVE CONTROLS
A negative control is a part of an experiment where the experimental conditions are
identical to the regular experiment except the substance being tested is not present.
Negative controls are suggestive of test organism health and/or laboratory quality and are
used to assess if apparent effects in experimental treatments are real. Performance of
negative controls is also used to determine test acceptability as dictated by individual test
methods.
Negative controls typically consist of dilution water (e.g. deionized water or filtered,
natural seawater). If an experiment calls for natural seawater, it is collected in a clean
carboy from the Scripps Institution of Oceanography pier in La Jolla, California.
Seawater is obtained a day or two before the test and discarded no later than 14 days after
collection. Depending on the objectives of the test, there may be other types of negative
controls including solvent controls, synthetic salt controls, or hypersaline brine (HSB)
controls. The analyst is responsible for determining which control(s) is/are relevant to a
test.
8.2 REFERENCE TOXICANT TESTS
Reference toxicant tests are a means of assessing test precision. These tests are
conducted concurrently with effluent samples, and employ a known toxicant known as a
reference toxicant. The reference toxicant is copper for most test species used at SSC-
SD. By exposing different batches of the test organism to the same concentrations of the
reference toxicant in the same dilution water, under identical testing conditions, the lab
can assess repeatability via comparison of LC50 or EC50 values for a given species.
Values are plotted on a control chart to monitor the lab's performance over time. In
general, reference toxicant test results that fall within two standard deviations above or
below the running mean are an indication of acceptable performance. In addition to the
mean and standard deviation, the coefficient of variation (CV) may also be used to
demonstrate the lab's precision. Actual tested concentrations in reference toxicant tests
are dependent on the test method due to differences in sensitivity among species and
endpoints.
30
-------
9.0 PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES FOR LABORATORY
EQUIPMENT AND CHEMICALS
9.1 PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE FOR EQUIPMENT
A preventive maintenance program for equipment increases laboratory efficiency,
reduces the potential for inferior quality test results, and prolongs the life of essential
laboratory tools. Analysts are trained in the proper use of all laboratory equipment and
how to troubleshoot problems associated with their normal function. Equipment
operating manuals are stored in a drawer labeled "Equipment Manuals" in Rm. 116 for
easy reference. Standard Operating Procedures including troubleshooting guides are also
available for commonly used equipment. When repairs required are beyond the
capability of the analyst, outside vendors are contacted for repair. A maintenance record
for equipment is kept in the lab. Information included in the maintenance record is
provided on the following page.
-------
-------
9.1 Preventive Maintenance for Equipment
Equipment
Description
Storage
Requirements
General
Maintenance
Frequency
Accumet
pH/i on/conductivity
meter model 50
Benchtop
Clean case with a mild detergent and damp
cloth. Never use solvent.
As needed
Accumet pH Probe
Between measurements: D.I. water
Overnight: pH 4.0 buffer
Long-term: cotton cap over electrode
Required when troubleshooting probe.
As needed
Orion Dissolved
Oxygen Meter model
840 and probe
Between measurements: put probe in
sleeve moistened with D.I. water
Overnight: turn meter off
Long-term: remove membrane and
replace when returned to service
Soak probe in silver anode cleaning solution,
refill electrolyte solution, and replace
membrane cap.
6 months or
As needed
Orion Portable
Dissolved Oxygen
Meter model 830A and
probe
Between measurements: D.I. water
Overnight: turn meter off
Long-term: remove membrane and
replace when returned to service
Clean external surfaces with water and a mild
detergent. Never wipe the meter with a dry
cloth.
Batteries - alkaline AA.
As needed
Orion Conductivity /
Salinity Meter model
105A+
Between measurements: D.I. water or
seawater
Overnight or Long-term: clean and dry
Clean case and touchscreen with a damp cotton
cloth. Do not use strong solvents.
Batteries - 9 volt.
Always recalibrate after battery change.
As needed
Orion 720A meter
Between measurements: lOppm
standard with ISA
Overnight: place electrode tip in a
lOOOppm standard without ISA
Long-term: disassemble completely and
rinse with D.I, water and dry
Send to Orion Technical Service for repairs.
As needed
Orion Ammonia Probe
model 95-12
Between measurements: 0.1M ammonia
standard
Long-term: disassemble and place in
storage box
Check membrane.
Refill internal filling solution.
As needed
33
-------
9.1 (cont.) Preventive Maintenance for Equipment
Equipment
Description
Hach DR 2400
Spectrophotometer
Storage
Requirements
Benchtop
General
Maintenance
Clean case and touchscreen with a damp cotton
cloth. Do not use strong solvents.
Batteries - 3 D-cell.
Send to HACH for recertification to maintain
accuracy in measurement.
Troubleshooting - www.hach.com for latest
information.
Frequency
As needed
34
-------
9.2 PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE FOR CHEMICALS
Chemicals for laboratory functions, such as glassware cleaning (acid water baths) and
reference toxicant testing (metal stock solutions), need to be properly made, maintained,
and disposed of to ensure high quality test results. Analysts are trained in how to safely
and accurately prepare chemical solutions. All containers holding chemicals are labeled
with the contents and the date prepared. The following chemicals are tracked on a log
sheet:
Reagent/
Solution
Nitric Acid bath -
10%
Concentrated
Nitric Acid
Copper (sulfate) -
1 ppt stock
Reagent Grade
CuSO4*5H2O
crystals
Zinc (sulfate) -
1 ppt stock
Reagent Grade
ZnSO4*7H2O
pH Buffers
0.1 N Ammonia
Standard
Ammonia ISA
Solution
Storage
20 L HOPE
container near
rear sink
Corrosives locker
500 mL
polycarbonate
container in
refrigerator at 4
ฐC
Original
bottle/Room
Temp
250 mL
polycarbonate
container in
refrigerator at 4
ฐC
Original
bottle/Room
Temp
Original
bottles/Room
Temp
Original
bottle/Room
Temp
Original
bottle/Room
Temp
35
-------
10.0 ACQUISITION, REDUCTION AND REPORTING OF DATA
10.1 ACQUISITION
At the beginning of a test, a test identification number is assigned in the "Test ID" log
stored in Rm 116 for easy cross-referencing. The Test ID is used on all other applicable
data sheets. Raw data is recorded in non-erasable ink on computer-derived data sheets.
Notes are taken on computer-derived note sheets. At a minimum, all data and note sheets
require the date, Sample ID, Test ID, analyst or operator, and species/method
identification or water quality parameter. Standard units as defined below are always
used to ensure consistency. Raw data and note sheets are stored in a notebook in the
Bioassay Laboratory. Copies are made for attachment in reports or other uses as
required. Details with respect to entry of data onto data sheets are provided in the SOP
Manual.
Parameter
PH
Salinity
Temperature
Dissolved Oxygen
Total Ammonia
Unionized Ammonia
Standard Unit
pH units
ppt or %o
ฐC
mg/L
mg/L
mg/L
10.2 DATA REDUCTION AND REPORTING
Data reduction is the process of transforming raw data into reportable material.
Mathematical manipulation and summary statistics are generated by means of computer
programs and laboratory equipment that perform these functions.
Once all measurements have been recorded on data sheets, data is manually entered into
spreadsheets or statistical programs. All phases of data transfer are double checked.
When computer programs are used to derive calculations, individual calculations are
performed by hand at random. Summaries and results are compared with raw data entries
to assure accurate data entry. Any suspect data is reported.
Depending on the objectives of the study, toxicity data are statistically analyzed using a
variety of tools, including ToxCalc 5.0, a software package designed specifically for
whole effluent toxicity test data. The staff is trained in the proper use of ToxCalc to
derive NOECs and LOECs using hypothesis testing and LC50/EC50 values using point
estimation techniques. The software is designed to be in accordance with EPA
recommend procedures for the analysis of whole effluent toxicity data. ToxCalc
summary sheets are saved on the computer in Rm 116 and printed out and placed into a
folder designated for the specific study for future reference. The "Statistical Analysis of
Data" SOP provides a detailed description of data analysis procedures for the staff to
follow.
36
-------
11.0 REPLICATION AND TEST SENSITIVITY
The sensitivity of toxicity tests will depend in part on the number of replicates per
concentration, the significance level selected, and the type of statistical analysis. If the
variability remains constant the sensitivity of the test will increase as the number of
replicates is increased. Minimum numbers of replicates are dictated by the individual
protocol. The actual numbers will depend on the objectives of the test and the statistical
method used for analysis of the data. For example, 20 fish per concentration are
generally considered optimal for Probit analysis. This typically equates to 4 replicates of
5 fish each. The Bioassay Laboratory meets minimum requirements for replication at all
times. The actual number of replicates used is typically a function of costs and project
goals, and may be discussed with the project manager/sponsor/client.
37
-------
12.0 CORRECTIVE ACTION
12.1 DETERMINING THE PROBLEM
Since each situation is unique regarding resolution of erroneous data, the following
guidelines are used in a manner that best suits the existing circumstance. The analyst and
laboratory director generally work on this together. Documentation of the
troubleshooting techniques used is required to allow follow up on the situation.
1. Compare results from the reference toxicant test to control chart values to
assess quality of test results. In general, if LC50 values fall within 2 standard
deviations of the mean, they are acceptable.
2. Compare the control (e.g. negative, solvent, salt, brine control) response to
test acceptability requirements as dictated by the SOP for the method.
3. Double-check all calculations (e.g. those for making reference toxicant stock
solutions and sub-stock solutions, dilutions and test organism counts).
4. Verify quality of the reference toxicant solutions or samples (e.g. were they
correctly made, did they violate holding time, are water quality parameters
within range tolerated by test organisms?).
5. Check all water quality parameters (pH, salinity, dissolved oxygen, ammonia,
temperature).
6. If there are any other tests being run via an analogous procedure, then
compare results. This may allow the analyst to exclude certain factors.
7. Assure properly treated/cleaned glassware was used in all phases of the test
set up and testing.
8. Re-read all notes taken during testing to determine if there are any conditions
in the laboratory that may conflict with proper testing procedures (light
sources, temperature, debris in glassware, incorrect calibration of equipment,
etc.).
9. Review scientific journals of relevance that may offer possible cause or
resolution.
10. If the erroneous data is being observed during data analysis, verify all entries
and confirm all calculations by hand.
38
-------
12.2 RESOLUTION
If the source of error is determined, appropriate action to resolve issues (e.g. repeat test,
note and remove erroneous data, re-calibrate equipment, etc.) is taken. Detailed accounts
of the corrective action are made for future reference. Although some data may be
considered "unacceptable" by not meeting DQOs, the data may still be potentially
"useful" to the study. Data should be evaluated for its usefulness on a case-by-case basis.
If the source of error is not determined, follow up testing or other measures may be
required. The approach may be discussed with the principal investigator or project
sponsor.
39
-------
13.0 AUDITS AND QUALITY ASSURANCE REPORTS
13.1 INTERNAL AUDITS
The laboratory director and analyst meet regularly to discuss status, required changes,
and proper execution of the Bioassay Lab's QA/QC program. Any deficiencies in the
program are documented and corrective action is taken towards remediation of the
problem(s). The following topics are typically covered in the review of the QA program
to ensure that:
QA Manual and SOPs are up to date
Equipment and Facilities are functioning properly
Equipment is being calibrated correctly
Reagents/standards/solvents are available and not expired
Samples are being handled properly
QC measures are being applied correctly
QC records (e.g. control charts) indicate lab is in control
Data is being properly managed and reported
Staff is receiving appropriate training
13.2 EXTERNAL A UDITS
To date, the Bioassay Lab has not been subjected to external audits. The laboratory,
however, agrees to comply and assist with future external audits that may be required.
13.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE REPORTS
The laboratory director and analyst meet on a regular basis to discuss results of internal
audits and evaluate the status of the quality assurance program. A report documenting
issues associated with any of the below topics is compiled as needed, but on a quarterly
basis at a minimum, depending on the level of testing taking place in the lab. Reports are
available to the Bioassay Lab staff as well as relevant principal investigators,
Environmental Sciences and Applied Systems (71750) Branch Head, and Advanced
Systems and Applied Sciences (717) Division Head. Areas covered in the quality
assurance report may include:
Audit findings
Certification status
Problematic data and effectiveness of corrective action taken
Modification/addition of SOPs
Personnel and instrumentation changes
Training courses held/attended
Status of new methods evaluated/new lab capabilities
40
-------
REFERENCES
ASTM 2002. Standard Terminology Relating to Biological Effects and
Environmental Fate. Standard E 943-00 in: Annual Book of Standards. Vol. 11.05
Biological Effects and Environmental Fate; Biotechnology; Pesticides. ASTM
International, West Conshohocken, PA.
USEPA 2000. Understanding and Accounting for Method Variability in Whole
Effluent Toxicity Applications Under the National Pollutant Discharge Elimination
System. June 2000. EPA 833-R-00-003.
USEPA 2002. Guidance for Developing Quality Systems for Environmental
Programs. EPA QA/G-1. EPA 240/R-02/008. November 2002.
SSC-SD 2004. The Lifecycle Management of Hazardous Materials / Hazardous
Waste at Space and Naval Warfare Systems Center San Diego. Space and Naval
Warfare Systems Center San Diego (SSC-SD). Document 4110. 1 April 2004.
Navy Regional Environmental Laboratory. 2003. Laboratory Quality Assurance
Manual, Revision No. 4.6. Navy Regional Environmental Laboratory, Public Works
Center Code 910, San Diego, CA. November 28, 2003.
Washington State Dept of Ecology. 2002. Procedural Manual for the Environmental
Laboratory Accreditation Program. Publication no. 02-03-055. November 2002.
Washington State Dept of Ecology. 2005. Laboratory Guidance and Whole Effluent
Toxicity Test Review Criteria. Publication no. WQ-R-95-80. June 2005.
41
-------
I. WATER SAMPLES
General Methodology
Water samples for copper analysis were collected in 30-mL acid-cleaned low-density
polyethylene bottles, which were acidified to pH <2 with quartz still-grade nitric acid (Q-HN03)
in a High Efficiency Particle Air (HEPA) class-100 all polypropylene working area. Copper
concentrations were measured with a Perkin-Elmer SCIEX ELAN DRC II inductively coupled
plasma with detection by mass spectrometry (ICP-MS; USEPA, 1994). If deemed necessary,
samples were diluted with 0.1 N Q-HN03 made up in high-purity (18 MO cm"1) water in order to
minimize matrix related interferences inherent to seawater. The samples were injected directly
into the ICP-MS via a Perkin-Elmer Autosampler 100. Analytical standards were made with
Perkin-Elmer multi-element standard solution (PEMES-3) diluted in IN Q-HN03; which was
matrix matched to the salinity of the test samples. Standards were analyzed at the beginning
and end of the run. The analysis also included measurement of the Standard Reference
Material (SRM) 1643e from the National Institute of Standards & Technology (NIST), and
analytical blanks made up of IN Q-HN03 after every five samples. A coefficient of variation (CV)
of <5% for replicate measurements will be observed, as well as a recovery within 15% of SRM
1643e.
II. SEDIMENT SAMPLES
Sediment Digestion
Adapted from:
David Strom, Stuart L. Simpson, Graeme E. Batley, and Diane F. Jolley. 2011. The influence of
sediment particle size and organic carbon on toxicity of copper to benthic invertebrates in
oxic/sub-oxic surface sediments. Environmental Toxicology and Chemistry 30(7): 1599-
1610.
Weigh a pre-labeled, pre-dried 125 mL LDPE bottle with cap and record the BOTTLE tare
mass (g).
Include at least six (6) blanks of a sample bottle with no sediment that will go thru all
the treatments of a regular sample, and the three (3) Standard Reference Materials
(SRMs), PACS-1, BCSS-1 and NIST 2709, each in triplicate (3X).
Pour 0.20 ฑ 0.05 g dry sediment sample in the bottle. In case of using wet sediment,
then pour 2.0 ฑ 0.05 g wet sediment.
Weigh about 0.25 ฑ 0.05 g of each SRMs in each of three (3) separate bottles.
Set bottle with sediment in an oven at 60ฐC for at least 24 hours. Take the cap out from
the bottle and set it down-side up by the bottle. NOTE: make sure the sediment is
completely dry before weighing and proceeding to add any acid.
Set bottle with dry sediment in a desiccator to cool down to room temperature.
-------
Weigh and record the BOTTLE plus DRY SEDIMENT mass (g)
Add 1.0 ml of concentrated trace metal grade (TMG) hydrochloric acid (HCI).
Add 0.5 ml of concentrated TMG nitric acid (HN03).
Allow the sample to digest at room temperature for 24 hours with loose cap.
Warm up on hot plate in clean bench for 1 hour with loose cap. Hot plates are set to
warm up to a temperature that does not melt the bottle
Alternatively: Microwave 2 times for 20 minutes at 100 W with loose cap
Add IN HN03 TMG to neck of bottle, about 130 g, and weigh and record BOTTLE plus
DIGESTATE final mass (g)
Allow particles to settle down and pipette volume required of digestate from the
overlying water
Alternatively: Filter thru 0.45 jam pore-size and pipette from filtered solution
Make up the appropriate dilution (e.g., 25, 50 or 100 ul of digestate to 15 ml or so) in an 15 ml
ICP-MS test tube with IN quartz-still grade HN03 (Q-HN03) for analysis using methodology
described above.
III. CLEAN ROOM TECHNIQUES
The clean room is located in Building 111 Room 242
To turn on Epure System
1. Turn on the red valve located to the left of the Barnstead filter unit. The valve is on
when it is parallel with the pipe.
2. Turn the switch located on the Barnstead unit on.
3. Allow digital read-out to reach 18.0 mega-ohm before using milli-Q (MQ) water.
4. Retrieve a lab coat and booties from adjacent room if there aren't any in the clean room
already.
5. Place a bootie over one shoe at a time while stepping onto sticky pad at the entrance of
room. Never let shoes touch the sticky pad without booties. This pad serves to remove
any dust particles that have gotten on the booties.
6. Once inside the room, close the door, put on lab coat and affix all buttons.
7. Put on nylon gloves.
8. Put on one pair of plastic gloves without touching anything above the wrist area of the
glove.
9. Put on a second pair of plastic gloves without touching anything above the wrist area on
the glove. Consider the first pair of plastic gloves contaminated and do not touch the
second pair anywhere above the wrist.
10. Gloves can be tightened over fingers by overlapping fingers. Hand should be kept in this
position when not in use to avoid contamination. See figure 1.
-------
Figure 1.
11. Do not touch the walls or the inside of the hood glass with hands.
12. Using the spicket, rinse gloves with MQ water, and then rinse the spicket itself.
13. Rinse grating inside hood to remove any settled dust particles.
Bringing an item into the Clean room or Hood
1. When bringing new items into the clean room, place in container on the floor until use.
2. When bringing item into hood, rinse the outside entirely three to four times with MQ
water from the spicket.
3. Next, rinse the inside entirely three to four times with MQ water from the spicket.
4. Water will be exiting into a bucket, be sure not to overflow.
5. Keep item near grating until rinsed thoroughly.
After use of clean room and hood
1. Rinse area down with spicket.
2. Use kimwipe to absorb water; do not repeat exposure of kimwipe surface after touching
another.
Filtering Samples
1. Loosen all caps from samples
2. Bring in Container and label it (acid washed scint vial) to place filtered sample in.
3. You should have the following items; 5% nitric acid in small container, 2 MQ
water containers, disposal container, cup with syringes, and filters.
4. Fill syringe with 5% nitric acid and place back into cup.
5. Empty acid into waste container from syringe
6. Semirinse with MQ water
7. Swirl sample and take 5 ml through plastic tip on syringe
-------
8. Remove plastic tip from syringe within sample allowing it to drain the tip into
the original sample bottle, replace tip with a clean filter
9. Dispose of the first 5-10 drops
10. Place remaining sample (about 5ml) in the labeled clean scint vial in hood.
11. If there is any sample remaining, place into the disposal container
12. Use additional MQ container to rinse syringe 2-3 times
13. Clean with nitric acid by allowing it to sit in syringe.
14. Rinse once with MQ water.
Begin with the lowest concentration and filter in order to the highest cone.
------- |